Перевод: с греческого на все языки

со всех языков на греческий

connected sense

  • 1 καταρτάω

    A hang up, suspend, Plu.Rom.16;

    τὶ ἔκ τινος Id.Marc. 8

    :—[voice] Pass., to be suspended, Arist.Pr. 874a18; κατήρτηντο βότρυσιν were hung thick with grapes, Luc.Am.12.
    II fasten, adjust, Χρῆμα κατηρτημένον a well-adjusted or convenient thing, Hdt.3.80; κατήρτητο became normal, recovered sense, Hp.Epid.1.26.ή; οὐδὲν -ημένον λέγειν to talk no connected sense, Id.Acut.(Sp.) 16:—later in [voice] Act.,

    τῇ θεῷ κατάρτησον σαυτήν Herod.1.62

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > καταρτάω

  • 2 συνάπτω

    I in physical sense, Χειρὶ Χεῖρα, of dancers, Ar.Th. 955 (lyr.); ξ. καὶ ξυνωρίζου Χέρα, in sign of friendship. E.Ba. 198, cf. IA 832, Pl.Lg. 698d; ἰδού, ξύναψον (sc. τὴν Χεῖρα) E.Ph. 106; but σ. Χεῖρέ τινος ἐν βρόχοις bind them fast, Id.Ba. 615 (troch.), cf. 546 (lyr.); ξ. πόδα, σ. ἴχνος τινί, meet him, Id. Ion 538 (troch.), 663;

    πόδα ἐς ταὐτὸν ὁδοῦ Id.Ph.37

    ; δρόμῳ ς. meet in full career, ib. 1101; ξ. κῶλον τάφῳ approach the grave, Id.Hel. 544;

    φόνος ξ. τινὰ γᾷ Id.Ph. 673

    (lyr.); ξ. βλέφαρα κόραις close the eyes, Id.Ba. 747; στόμα ς. kiss one, Id.IT 375; κακὰ κακοῖς ς. link misery with misery, Id.HF 1213 (lyr.); κακὰ ξ... τινί link him with misery, Id.Med. 1232; prov., σ. λίνον λίνῳ join thread to thread, i.e. compare things of the same sort, Stratt.38, Pl.Euthd. 298c, Arist.Ph. 207a17, cf. Sch.Pl.l.c.; also δύ' ἐξ ἑνὸς κακὼ ς. E.IT 488, cf. Hipp. 515; κοινὴν ξ. δαῖτα παιδί share with him a common meal, Id. Ion 807 (troch.).
    2 metaph. of combination in thought,

    σ. αὐτὰ εἰς ἓν τρία ὄντα Pl.R. 588d

    ;

    σ. ἐν τοῖς λόγοις Id.Sph. 252c

    ;

    ἔχουσί τι κοινὸν [αἱ ἀρχαὶ] τὸ συνάπτον αὐτάς Arist.Fr.17

    ;

    εἴ τι σ. ἢ ἀφαιρεῖ ἡ διάνοια Id.Metaph. 1027b32

    (

    διαιρεῖ Alex.Aphr.

    ); ἀδύνατα ς. Id.Po.1458a27, cf. Phld.Sto.Herc.339.13;

    σ. τὸ γίγνεσθαί θ' ἅμα καὶ τὴν τελευτὴν τοῦ βίου Alex.149.18

    ; σ. μηχανήν frame a plan, A.Ag. 1609, cf. E.Hel. 1034; σ. ὄναρ εἴς τινα connect it with him, refer it to him, Id.IT[59];

    σ. λόγον πρός τι D.60.12

    ;

    πρὸς τὸ ἄκρον οὐ σ. τὸν συλλογισμόν Arist. APr. 69a18

    ; σ. ἀλλήλοις τό τ' ἐκστάντες καὶ τὸ ὀξέως" take together, Gal.16.547; συνῆψε τὸν λόγον he continues as follows, Id.15.148; but σ. τὸν λόγον, abridge, Theopomp.Com.22: c. acc. et dat., associate with or attribute to,

    τί τινι Epicur.Nat.11.9

    , Sent.Vat.39, Demetr.Lac.Herc.1055.15, cf. Phld.Sign.20:—[voice] Pass.,

    συνάπτεται ἕτερον ἐξ ἄλλου Pl.Sph. 245e

    , cf. Phd. 60b (v.l.), Epicur.Ep.2p.37U., Nat.28.11; of the words of a sentence,

    συνάπτεσθαι ἀλλήλοις Gal. 16.546

    .
    II with regard to persons,
    1 in hostile sense, σ. τὰ στρατόπεδα εἰς μάχην bring them into action, Hdt.5.75; ἐλπὶς.. ἣ πολλὰς πόλεις συνῆψε has engaged them in conflict, E.Supp. 480; so συνῆψε πάντας ἐς μίαν βλάβην involved them in.., Id.Ba. 1303; for S.Aj. 1317, v. συλλύω 11.
    b σ. μάχην join battle, Hdt.6.108;

    στρατεύματι A.Pers. 336

    , cf. E.Heracl. 808;

    σ. πόλεμον πρός τινας Th. 6.13

    ;

    συνάψαι πόλεμον Ἕλλησιν μέγαν E.Hel.55

    , cf. Hdt.1.18;

    τοῖς σοφοῖς εὐκτὸν σοφῷ ἔχθραν συνάπτειν Id.Heracl.459

    ;

    σ. ἀλκήν Id.Supp.683

    ; also (without μάχην), engage, Hdt.4.80, cf. Ar.Ach. 686 (troch.);

    σ. συνάψεις LXX 4 Ki.10.34

    ;

    σ. φασγάνων ἀκμάς E.Or. 1482

    (lyr.);

    ἔγχη Id.Ph. 1192

    ; οὐκ εὐθὺς συνῆψε τὰς ἀπορίας has not immediately rejoined by stating the difficulties, Procl. in Prm.p.533 S.: abs., approach, make contact, Plu.Tim.25:—[voice] Pass.,

    μοι πρός τινας νεῖκος συνῆπτο Hdt.7.158

    , cf. 6.94.
    2 in friendly sense, σ. ἑαυτὸν εἰς λόγους τινί enter into conversation with him, Ar.Lys. 468 (cf. infr. B.11.1);

    φιλία σ. τοὺς καλούς τε κἀγαθούς X.Mem.2.6.22

    :—[voice] Pass., παλλακαῖς συνημμένος, of Aristotle, App.Anth.5.11.
    b c. acc. rei,

    σ. μῦθον E.Supp. 566

    ;

    σ. ὅρκους Id.Ph. 1241

    ;

    κοινωνίαν X.Lac.6.3

    ;

    φιλίαν πρός τινα D.H.19.13

    , cf. 2.30; freq. in E., σ. τινὶ γάμους, λέκτρα, κῆδος, form an alliance by marriage, Ph. 1049 (lyr.), 49, Andr. 620, etc.;

    γένναν Id.Fr. 558

    ;

    τὸν ἔρωτα τῇ κούρῃ Aret.SD1.5

    :—in [voice] Med., κῆδος ξυνάψασθαι τῆς θυγατρός get one's daughter married, Th. 2.29:—[voice] Pass.,

    οἱ γάμοι συνήφθησαν PLips.41.7

    (iv A.D.);

    ᾧ συνήφθην ἐκ παρθενίας PSI1.41.5

    (iv A.D.); συναφθεῖσά μοι ὡς γαμετή,.. συνήφθην σοι πρὸς γάμου καὶ βίου κοινωνίαν, PMasp.153.5,8 (iv A.D.);

    μὴ πρὸς γάμον ἡ παῖς καὶ ἑτέρῳ τινὶ συναφθείη Chor. p.227

    B.
    III Math., esp. in [tense] pf. [voice] Pass., ὁ λόγος συνῆπται ἔκ τε τοῦ.. καὶ τοῦ.. the ratio is compounded of.., Archim.Sph.Cyl.2.4, al.; ἀναλογία συνημμένη continued proportion (cf.

    συνεχής 1.3

    ), Nicom.Ar.2.21; συνημμένη μεσότης geometric mean, ibid.
    3 in Logic, συνημμένον ἀξίωμα or τὸ σ., hypothetical proposition as premiss in a syllogism. Chrysipp.Stoic.2.68, Phld.Sign.32, S.E.M.8.109, Gell.16.8.9: pl., Plu.2.43c, Procl. in Prm. p.533 S.; κοῖα συνῆπται; what conclusion follows? Call.Fr.70.3:—cf.

    συνάρτησις 11

    .
    B intr.:
    I in local sense, border on, lie next to,

    τὸ πεδίον τοῦτο συνάπτει τῷ Αἰγυπτίῳ πεδίῳ Hdt.2.75

    ;

    Τήνῳ συνάπτουσ' Ἄνδρος A.Pers. 885

    (lyr.); γεώλοφοι συνάπτοντες [ τῷ ποταμῷ] reaching to.., Plb.3.67.9;

    ἐὰν διώρυγες συνάπτωσι τοῖς Χώμασι PLille 1v

    .7 (iii B.C.); [

    τῆς τραχείας ἀρτηρίας] τὸ συνάπτον τῷ στόματι πέρας Gal.6.421

    ; ποταμοῦ στόμα συνάπτον θαλάττῃ ib.712;

    αὗται μὲν σ., αἱ δ' ἄλλαι ἀσύναπτοι Arist.HA 516a30

    ; δύο πόροι εἰς ἓν ς. ib. 508a13; τὰ βράγχια σ. ἀλλήλοις ib. 507a5; ἡ κοιλία σ. πρὸς τὸ στόμα ib. 507a28; of the sides of a cone,

    πρὸς μίαν κορυφὴν συνάπτειν Thphr.Vert.4

    .
    2 of Time, to be nigh at hand,

    ὥρα συνάπτει Pi.P.4.247

    ;

    σ. πρὸς τὸν Χειμῶνα Hp.Aph.2.25

    ;

    συνάψαντος τοῦ Χρόνου Plb.2.2.8

    ;

    συνάψαντος τοῦ καιροῦ Id.6.36.1

    , etc.
    3 metaph., σ. ἐν αὐτῇ πάνθ' ὅσα δεῖ τοῖς φίλοις ὑπάρχειν meet together, Arist.EN 1156b18; οὐ σ. [ αὗται αἱ φιλίαι] do not combine, ib. 1157a34; to be connected with, τῷ γένει αἱ ἰδέαι ς. Id.Metaph. 1042a15;

    σ. πρός τι Id.Pol. 1276a7

    , Cat. 4b26, APr. 41a1; attach, Id.HA 580a15; λύπη σ. [ τῷ θεραπεύειν] E.Hipp. 187 (anap.), cf. Chrysipp.Stoic.2.174; ὁ πόνος ὁ ὑπερβάλλων συνάψει θανάτῳ will border upon death, Epicur.Fr. 448; σ. εἴς τι have reference to, Thphr.CP6.1.2.
    II of persons, ξ. λόγοισιν enter into conversation, S.El.21;

    ἐς λόγους σ. τινί E.Ph. 702

    ; σ. εἰς Χορεύματα join the dance, Id.Ba. 133 (lyr.); ἐς Χεῖρα γῇ come close to land, Id.Heracl. 429; σ. εἰς τὸν καιρόν come in just at the right time, Plb.3.19.2; σ. τοῖς ἄκροις reach, them, Id.3.93.5, etc.;

    σ. εἰς Σελεύκειαν Id.5.66.4

    ;

    πρὸς τὴν παρεμβολήν Id.3.53.10

    , etc.
    2 τύχα ποδὸς ξυνάπτει (s.v.l., - πτοι Murray) μοι, i.e. I have come fortunately, E.Supp. 1014 (lyr.).
    3 Astrol., of a heavenly body, to be in conjunction ([etym.] συναφή) with another, Nech. ap. Vett.Val.280.2, Ptol.Tetr.52, PMag. Leid.W.24.15, Man.2.452, Paul.Al.H.1.
    C [voice] Med., unite for oneself and so form,

    φιλίαν D.S.13.32

    ;

    κῆδος D.C.41.57

    ; v.supr.A.11.2b.
    2 to be next to, connected with, τινι X. Oec.5.3.
    4 take part with one, assist, τινι E.Hel. 1444: abs., A.Pers. 742 (troch.); τινος in a thing, ib. 724 (troch.), S.Fr. 874.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > συνάπτω

  • 3 ἔχω

    ἔχω (A), [ per.] 2sg. ἔχεισθα cj. in Thgn. 1316 ( ἔχοισθα cod.), ἔχῃσθα cj. in Sapph.21 ( ἔχεισθα cod.); [ per.] 2sg. subj.
    A

    ἔχῃσθα Il.19.180

    : [tense] impf. εἶχον, [dialect] Ep.

    ἔχον Od.2.22

    , al., [dialect] Ion. and poet.

    ἔχεσκον Il.13.257

    , Hdt.6.12, Epigr.Gr.988.6 ([place name] Balbilla): [tense] fut. ἕξω, [dialect] Ep. inf.

    ἑξέμεναι Call.Aet.3.1.27

    (of duration) or σχήσω (of momentary action, esp. in sense check, v. infr. A. 11.9, not found in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. or NT); [ per.] 2sg.

    σχήσησθα h.Cer. 366

    codd.: [tense] aor. 1 ἔσχης α f.l.in Nonn.D.17.177, also

    ἔσχα IG3.1363.6

    , 14.1728, [ per.] 3pl. μετ-έσχαν ib.12(7).271.12 (Amorgos, iii A.D.): [tense] aor. 2 ἔσχον, imper.

    σχές S.El. 1013

    , E.Hipp. 1353 (anap.) ( σχέ only in Orac. ap. Sch.E.Ph. 638 (dub.l.), sts. in compds. in codd., as

    πάρασχε E.Hec. 842

    ,

    κάτασχε Id.HF 1210

    ); subj.

    σχῶ Il.21.309

    , etc.; opt.

    σχοίην Isoc. 1.45

    , in compds. σχοῖμι (as

    μετάσχοιμι S.OC 1484

    (lyr.),

    κατάσχοιμεν Th.6.11

    ); [ per.] 3pl.

    σχοίησαν Hyp.Eux.32

    ,

    σχοῖεν Th.6.33

    ; inf.

    σχεῖν Il. 16.520

    , etc., [dialect] Ep.

    σχέμεν 8.254

    (in Alexandr. Gr. [ per.] 3pl. [tense] impf. and [tense] aor. 2

    εἴχοσαν AP5.208

    (Posidipp. or Asclep.), v.l. in Ev.Jo.15.22,

    ἔσχοσαν Scymn.695

    ): for the poet. form ἔσχεθον, v. Σχέθω: [tense] pf.

    ἔσχηκα Pl.Lg. 765a

    , εἴσχηκα in Inscrr. of iii/i B.C., SIG679.54, etc.; [dialect] Ep. ὄχωκα is dub., v. συνόχωκα:—[voice] Med., [tense] impf.

    εἰχόμην Pi.P.4.244

    , etc.: [tense] fut.

    ἕξομαι Il.9.102

    , etc.; σχήσομαι ib. 235, Ar.Av. 1335, more freq. in compds. ( ἀνα-) A.Th. 252, ( παρα-) Lys.9.8, etc.: [tense] pf. [voice] Pass. παρ-έσχημαι in med. sense, X.An.7.6.11, etc.: [tense] aor. 2

    ἐσχόμην Hom.

    , Hdt.6.85, rare in [dialect] Att. exc. in compds.; imper.

    σχέο Il.21.379

    ,

    σχέσθε 22.416

    , later σχοῦ in compds. ( ἀνά- ) E. lon947, etc.; inf.

    σχέσθαι Od.4.422

    , Hes.Fr.79:—[voice] Pass., [tense] fut. [voice] Med. ἐν-έξομαι in pass. sense, E.Or. 516, D.51.11, later

    σχεθήσομαι Gal.UP15.3

    , freq. in compds. (συ- ) Phld.Ir.p.83 W., (ἐν- ) Plu.2.98 of, ( ἐπι-) S.E.P.1.186: [tense] aor. 1

    ἐσχέθην Arr.An.5.7.4

    , 6.11.2, Aret.SA2.5, (κατ-, συν-) Plu.Sol. 21, Hp.Int. 45 vulg.: [tense] fut. [voice] Med. σχήσομαι in pass. sense, Il.9.235 (dub.), 655, 13.630: [tense] aor. 2 [voice] Med. in pass. sense,

    ἐσχόμην Il.17.696

    , al., Hdt. 1.31 (

    σχέτο Il.7.248

    , 21.345), part.

    σχόμενος Od.11.279

    , prob. in Isoc.19.11, ( κατα-) Pi.P.1.10, Pl.Phdr. 244e, Parth.33.2 (s.v.l.): [tense] pf.

    ἔσχημαι Paus.4.21.2

    ; also in compds., freq. written - ίσχημαι, -ήσχημαι in codd. of late authors. (I.-E. seĝh- (cf. Skt. sáhate 'overpower', Goth. sigis 'victory', Gr. ἔχ- dissim. fr. ἔχ-), reduced form sĝh-(σχ-), whence redupl. ἴσχω ( = si-sĝh-o) (q.v.): cf. ἕκ-τωρ, ἕξω, ἕξις; but hέχ- IG12.374.161, al., is a mere error (ἔχ- ib.12.116.4, 16).)
    A Trans., have, hold:
    I possess, of property, the most common usage, Od.2.336, 16.386, etc.; οἵ τι ἔχοντες the propertied class, Hdt.6.22; ὁ ἔχων a wealthy man, S.Aj. 157 (anap.);

    οἱ ἔχοντες E.Alc.57

    , Ar.Eq. 1295, Pl. 596; οἱ οὐκ ἔχοντες the poor, E.Supp. 240;

    κακὸν τὸ μὴ 'χειν Id.Ph. 405

    ; ἔχειν χρέα to have debts due to one, D. 36.41, cf. 37.12; to have received,

    θεῶν ἄπο κάλλος ἐ. h.Ven.77

    ;

    τι ἔκ τινος S.OC 1618

    ;

    παρά τινος Id.Aj. 663

    ;

    πρός τινος X.An.7.6.33

    , etc.;

    ὑπὸ.. θεοῖσι h.Ap. 191

    ; πλέον, ἔλασσον ἔ.. (v. h. vv.): in [tense] aor., acquire, get,

    ὄνομα E. Ion 997

    : also [tense] fut.

    σχήσω, δύναμιν Th.6.6

    ;

    λέχος E.Hel.30

    , cf. Pi.P.9.116:—[voice] Pass., to be possessed,

    ἔντεα.. μετὰ Τρώεσσιν ἔχονται Il.18.130

    , cf. 197.
    2 keep, have charge of,

    ἔχον πατρώϊα ἔργα Od. 2.22

    ;

    κῆπον 4.737

    ;

    Εἰλείθυιαι.. ὠδῖνας ἔχουσαι Il.11.271

    ;

    πύλαι.., ἃς ἔχον Ὧραι 5.749

    , 8.393;

    τὰς ἀγέλας X.Cyr.7.3.7

    ; διαιτητῶν ἐχόντων τὰς δίκας having control of, D.47.45; to be engaged in, φυλακὰς ἔχον kept watch, Il.9.1, 471;

    σκοπιὴν ἔχεν Od.8.302

    ;

    ἀλαοσκοπιὴν εἶχε Il. 10.515

    , 13.10; σκοπιὴν ἔ. τινός for a thing, Hdt.5.13;

    δυσμενῶν θήραν ἔχων S.Aj. 564

    , etc.; ἐν χερσὶν ἔ. τι (v. χείρ).
    b metaph., of a patient, οὐκ ἔχει ἑωυτόν is not himself, Hp.Int.49.
    3 c. acc. loci, inhabit,

    οὐρανόν Il.21.267

    ;

    Ὄλυμπον 5.890

    ; haunt, [

    Νύμφαι] ἔχουσ' ὀρέων αἰπεινὰ κάρηνα Od.6.123

    ;

    Βρόμιος ἔχει τὸν χῶρον A.Eu.24

    ; esp. of tutelary gods and heroes, Th.2.74, X.Cyr.8.3.24; of men,

    πόλιν καὶ γαῖαν Od.6.177

    , 195, etc.; Θήβας ἔσχον ( ἔσχεν codd.) ruled it, E.HF 4; ἔχεις γὰρ χῶρον occupiest it, S.OC37, cf. Od.23.46; in military sense, ἔ. τὸ δεξιόν (with or without κέρας) Th.3.107, X.An.2.1.15; of beasts,

    τὰ ὄρη ἔ. Id.Cyn.5.12

    .
    4 have to wife or as husband (usu. without γυναῖκα, ἄνδρα)

    , οὕνεκ' ἔχεις Ἑλένην καί σφιν γαμβρὸς Διός ἐσσι Od. 4.569

    , cf.7.313, Il.3.53, etc.;

    ἔσχε ἄλλην ἀδελφεήν Hdt.3.31

    , cf. Th.2.29;

    νυμφίον Call.Aet.3.1.27

    ; also of a lover, Th.6.54, AP5.185 (Posidipp.), etc.;

    ἔχω Λαΐδα, ἀλλ' οὐκ ἔχομαι Aristipp.

    ap. D.L.2.75, cf. Ath. 12.544d:—in [voice] Pass.,

    τοῦ περ θυγάτηρ ἔχεθ' Ἕκτορι Il.6.398

    .
    5 have in one's house, entertain, Od.17.515, 20.377, h.Ven. 231, 273.
    6 [tense] pres. part. with Verbs, almost, = with,

    ἤϊε ἔχων ταῦτα Hdt.3.128

    , cf. 2.115;

    ὃς ἂν ἥκῃ ἔχων στρατόν Id.7.8

    .δ', cf. X.Cyr.1.6.10.—Prose use.
    7 of Place, ἐπ' ἀριστερὰ ἔ. τι keep it on one's left, i.e. to keep to the right of it, Od.3.171;

    ἐπ' ἀριστερὰ χειρὸς ἔ. 5.277

    ; ἐν δεξιᾷ, ἐν ἀριστερᾷ ἔ., Th.3.106; τοὺς οἰκέτας ὑστάτους ἔ. X.Cyr.4.2.2: but in [tense] aor., get,

    περιπλώοντες τὴν Λιβύην τὸν ἥλιον ἔσχον ἐς τὰ δεξιά Hdt.4.42

    .
    8 of Habits, States, or Conditions, bodily or mental,

    γῆρας λυγρὸν ἔ Od.24.250

    ;

    ἀνεκτὸν ἔχει κακόν 20.83

    ;

    ἕλκος Il.16.517

    ;

    λύσσαν 9.305

    ;

    μάχην ἔ. 14.57

    ;

    ἀρετῆς πέρι δῆριν ἔ. Od.24.515

    ; ὕβριν ἔ. indulge in.., 1.368, etc.; [ Ἀφροδίτην] 22.445; [

    φρένας] ἔ. Il.13.394

    , etc.;

    βουλήν 2.344

    ;

    τλήμονα θυμόν 5.670

    ;

    τόνδε νόον καὶ θυμὸν ἐνὶ στήθεσσιν ἔχοντες 4.309

    , cf. Od.14.490 (for later senses of νοῦν ἔχειν, v. νοῦς)

    ; ἄλγεα Il.5.895

    , etc.;

    ἄχεα θυμῷ 3.412

    ;

    πένθος μετὰ φρεσίν 24.105

    ;

    πένθος φρεσίν Od.7.219

    ;

    πόνον.. καὶ ὀϊζύν Il.13.2

    , Od.8.529;

    οὐδὲν βίαιον Hdt.3.15

    ;

    πρήγματα ἔ. Id.7.147

    , cf. Pl.Tht. 174b, etc.: in periphrastic phrases, ποθὴν ἔ. τινός, = ποθεῖν, Il.6.362; ἐπιδευὲς ἔ. τινός, = ἐπιδεύεσθαι, 19.180; ἔ. τέλος, = τελεῖσθαι, 18.378; κότον ἔ. τινί, = κοτεῖσθαι, 13.517;

    ἐπιθυμίαν τινός E.Andr. 1281

    ;

    φροντίδα τινός Id.Med. 1301

    ; ἡσυχίην ἔ. keep quiet, Hdt.2.45, etc. ([tense] fut.

    ἡσυχίαν ἕξειν D.47.29

    , but οὐκ ἔσθ' ὅπως.. ἡ. σχήσει will not keep still for a moment, Id.1.14); αἰτίαν ἔ. to be accused, X.An.7.1.8;

    ὑπό τινος A.Eu.99

    (but μομφὴν ἔ., = μέμφεσθαι, E.Or. 1069, A.Pr. 445): in [tense] aor., of entering upon a state, ἔσχεν χόλον conceived anger, B. 5.104; ἔχειν τι κατά τινος have something against somebody, Ev.Matt.5.23, Ev.Marc.11.25, Apoc.2.4;

    ἔχω τι πρός τινα Act.Ap.24.19

    ;

    ἔχειν πρός τινα 2 Ep.Cor.5.12

    ;

    ἕξει πρὸς τὸν Θεόν JRS14.85

    ([place name] Laodicea): —these phrases are freq. inverted,

    οὓς ἔχε γῆρας Il.18.515

    ;

    οὐδὲ Ποσειδάωνα γέλως ἔχε Od.8.344

    ;

    ἀμηχανίη δ' ἔχε θυμόν 9.295

    ;

    θάμβος δ' ἔχεν εἰσορόωντας Il.4.79

    ;

    σ' αὔτως κλέος ἐσθλὸν ἔχει 17.143

    ;

    Διὸς αἴσῃ, ἥ μ' ἕξει παρὰ νηυσί 9.609

    (unless the antecedent is τιμῆς in 1.608);

    ὥς σφεας ἡσυχίη τῆς πολιορκίης ἔσχε Hdt.6.135

    ;

    ὄφρα με βίος ἔχῃ S.El. 225

    (lyr.): c. dupl. acc.,

    φόβος μ' ἔχει φρένας A.Supp. 379

    ; also of external objects,

    αἴθρη ἔχει κορυφήν Od.12.76

    ;

    μιν ἔχεν μένος ἠελίοιο 10.160

    ;

    σε οἶνος ἔχει φρένας 18.331

    ; ἔχῃ βέλος ὀξὺ γυναῖκα, of a woman in travail, Il.11.269; λόγος ἔχει τινά c. inf., the story goes, that.., S.OC 1573 (lyr.); and so in later Gr., Plu.Dem.28, Ph. 1.331, Ael.VH3.14, NA5.42, Ath.13.592e;

    ὡς ἡ φάτις μιν ἔχει Hdt. 7.3

    , cf. 5,26, 9.78 (but also

    ἔχει φάτιν Διονυσοφάνης θάψαι Μαρδόνιον Id.9.84

    ; [

    Κλεισθένης] λόγον ἔχει τὴν Πυθίην ἀναπεῖσαι Id.5.66

    ); ὡς ἂν λόγος ἔχῃ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους, ὅτι .. Plu.Alex.38:—[voice] Pass.,

    ἔχεσθαι κακότητι καὶ ἄλγεσι Od.8.182

    ;

    κωκυτῷ καὶ οἰμωγῇ Il.22.409

    ;

    ὀργῇ Hdt.1.141

    ;

    νούσῳ Hp.Epid.5.6

    ;

    ἀγρυπνίῃσι Hdt.3.129

    ;

    ὑπὸ πυρετοῦ Hp.Aph.4.34

    ;

    ὑπὸ τοῦ ὕδρωπος Id.Prorrh.2.6

    ,

    ἐν ἀπόρῳ Th.1.25

    ;

    ἐν συμφοραῖς Pl.R. 395e

    .
    9 possess mentally, understand,

    ἵππων δμῆσιν Il.17.476

    ;

    τέχνην Hes.Th. 770

    ;

    πάντ' ἔχεις λόγον A. Ag. 582

    , cf. E.Alc.51;

    ἔχετε τὸ πρᾶγμα S.Ph. 789

    ; ἔχεις τι; do you understand? Ar.Nu. 733: imper. ἔχε attend! listen! Pl.Alc.1.109b; ἔ. οὖν ib. 129b: with imper.,

    ἔχ', ἀποκάθαιρε Ar. Pax 1193

    ;

    ἔ. νυν, ἄλειψον Id.Eq. 490

    ; ἔχεις τοῦτο ἰσχυρῶς; Pl.Tht. 154a; know of a thing,

    μαντικῆς ὁδόν S.OT 311

    ; τινὰ σωτηρίαν; E.Or. 778 (troch.).
    10 keep up, maintain, καναχὴν ἔχε made a rattling noise, Il.16.105, 794; βοὴν ἔχον, of flutes and lyres, 18.495.
    11 involve, admit of,

    τά γ' αἰσχρὰ κἀνθάδ' αἰσχύνην ἔχει E.Andr. 244

    , cf. Th.1.5;

    βάσανον Lys.12.31

    ;

    ταῦτ' ἀπιστίαν, ταῦτ' ὀργὴν ἔχει D.10.44

    ; ἀγανάκτησιν, κατάμεμψιν, Th.2.41;

    τὰ ἀόρατα νοσήματα δυσχερεστέραν ἔχει τὴν θεραπείαν Onos. 1.15

    .
    12 of Measure or Value,

    τὸ Δαμαρέτειον.. εἶχε Ἀττικὰς δραχμὰς δέκα D.S.11.26

    ;

    ἔχει τὸ Εὐβοϊκὸν τάλαντον Ἀλεξανδρείους δραχμὰς ἑπτακισχιλίας App.Sic.2.2

    ;

    χοῖρος ἔχων τὸ ὕψος δύο καὶ ἡμίσους πήχεων Ptol.Euerg.9

    .
    13 c. dupl.acc.,

    Ὀρφέα ἄνακτ' ἔχειν E.Hipp. 953

    ;

    Ζῆν' ἔχειν ἐπώμοτον S.Tr. 1188

    ;

    παιδιὰν ἔ. τὸν ἐκείνου θάνατον Seleuc.

    Alex. ap. Ath.4.155e.
    II hold:
    1 hold, ἔ. χερσίν, ἐν χερσίν, μετὰ χερσίν, etc., v. χείρ; μετὰ γαμφηλῇσιν ἔ. Il.13.200; πρόσθεν ἔ. ἀσπίδα ib. 157; ὑψοῦ, πασάων ὑπέρ, ὄπιθεν κάρη ἔ., 6.509, Od.6.107, Il. 23.136; ἔ. τινί τι to hold it for him, as his helper, 9.209, 13.600; uphold,

    οὐρανὸν.. κεφαλῇ τε καὶ ἀκαμάτῃσι χέρεσσι Hes.Th. 517

    , 746; ἔχει δέ τε κίονας of Atlas, Od.1.53;

    ἐπ' ὤμων πατέρα S.Fr.

    373.
    2 hold fast, χειρὸς ἔχων Μενέλαον holding him by the hand, Il.4.154, cf. 16.763, 11.488 (v. infr. C.I); ἔ. τινὰ μέσον grip one by the middle, of wrestlers, Ar.Nu. 1047;

    ἔχομαι μέσος Id.Ach. 571

    , cf. Eq. 388, Ra. 469: metaph., ἔ. φρεσί keep in one's mind, Il.2.33;

    νῷ ἔ. τινά Pl.Euthphr.2b

    , cf. R. 490a.
    3 of arms and clothes, bear, wear,

    εἷμα δ' ἔχ' ἀμφ' ὤμοισι Il.18.538

    , cf. 595;

    παρδαλέην ὤμοισιν ἔ. 3.17

    ;

    σάκος ὤμῳ 14.376

    ;

    κυνέην κεφαλῇ Od.24.231

    ;

    τάδε εἵματ' ἔχω 17.24

    , cf. 573, etc.;

    στολὴν ἀμφὶ σῶμα E.Hel. 554

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.4.26, etc.; πολιὰς ἔχω I am grey-haired, Aeschin.1.49: abs., as a category, Arist.Cat. 2a3.
    4 of a woman, to be pregnant, Hdt.5.41, Hp.Epid.4.21, Arist.Pol. 1335b18; in full

    ἐν γαστρὶ ἔ. Hdt.3.32

    ; also

    πρὸς ἑωυτῇ ἔχειν Hp.Epid.1.26

    .ιγ.
    b παῖδα ἔσχεν she had, i.e. bore, a child, Nic.Dam.11 J.
    5 support, sustain, esp. an attack, c. acc. pers., Il.13.51, 20.27; cf. B.I.1, C. 111.
    6 hold fast, keep close, ὀχῆες εἶχον [πύλας] 12.456;

    θύρην ἔχε μοῦνος ἐπιβλής 24.453

    .
    7 enclose,

    φρένες ἧπαρ ἔχουσι Od.9.301

    ;

    σάρκας τε καὶ ὀστέα ἶνες ἔ. 11.219

    ;

    τοὺς δ' ἄκραντος ἔχει νύξ A.Ch.65

    (lyr.); of places, contain,

    θηρῶν οὓς ὅδ' ἔχει χῶρος S.Ph. 1147

    (lyr.), cf. X.Cyn.5.4; [

    τεῖχος] νῆας ἐντὸς ἔχον Il.12.8

    ;

    ὅσσους Κρήτη ἐντὸς ἔχει h.Ap.30

    .
    8 hold or keep in a certain direction, ὀϊστὸν ἔχε aimed it, Il.23.871; more fully

    χεῖράς τε καὶ ἔγχεα.. ἀντίον ἀλλήλων 5.569

    ; of horses or ships, guide, drive, steer,

    πεδίονδ' ἔχον ὠκέας ἵππους 3.263

    , cf. 11.760;

    φόβονδε 8.139

    ;

    τῇ ῥα.. ἔχον ἵππους 5.752

    , etc.;

    παρὲξ ἔχε δίφρον Hes.Sc. 352

    ;

    ὅπῃ ἔσχες.. εὐεργέα νῆα Od.9.279

    ;

    παρὰ τὴν ἤπειρον ἔ. νέας Hdt.6.95

    , etc.: abs., τῇ ῥ' ἔχε that way he held his course, Il.16.378, cf. 23.422; Πύλονδ' ἔχον I held on to Pylos, Od.3.182, cf. S.El. 720: metaph.,

    ἐπὶ ῥητορείαν ἔσχε Hsch.Mil.

    (?)ap.Sch.Pl.R. 600c; also (esp. in [tense] fut. σχήσω, [tense] aor. 2 ἔσχον), put in, land,

    νέες ἔσχον ἐς τὴν Ἀργολίδα χώρην Hdt. 6.92

    ;

    σχεῖν πρὸς τὴν Σαλαμῖνα Id.8.40

    ; ἐς Φειάν, τῷ Δήλῳ, κατὰ τὸ Ποσειδώνιον, Th.2.25,3.29, 4.129;

    τάχ' οὖν τις ἄκων ἔσχε S.Ph. 305

    ; ποῖ σχήσειν δοκεῖς; Ar.Ra. 188; ἔχε.. ἀρὰν ἐπ' ἄλλοις point it against others, S.Ph. 1119 (lyr.); ὄμμ' ἔ. to turn or keep one's eye fixed, Id.Aj. 191 (lyr.);

    ἐπὶ ἔργῳ θυμὸν ἔ. Hes.Op. 445

    ;

    ἄλλοσ' ὄμμα θητέρᾳ δὲ νοῦν ἔ. S.Tr. 272

    ;

    τὸν δὲ νοῦν ἐκεῖσ' ἔχει E.Ph. 360

    ; δεῦρο νοῦν ἔχε attend to this, Id.Or. 1181; πρός τινα or πρός τι τὸν νοῦν ἔ., Th.3.22, 7.19; so

    πρός τινα τὴν γνώμην ἔ. Id.3.25

    .
    9 hold in, stay, keep back,

    ἵππους Il.4.302

    , 16.712; check, stop, [ τινα] 23.720, etc. ( σχήσω is usu. [tense] fut. in this sense,

    τὸ πεπρωμένον οὐ σιδάρεον σχήσει τεῖχος Pi.Fr. 232

    , cf. Il.11.820, Ar.Lys. 284, D.19.272, but

    ἕξω Il.13.51

    ); χεῖρας ἔχων Ἀχιλῆος holding his hands, 18.33; but οὐ σχήσει χεῖρας will not stay his hands, Od.22.70; ἔ. [δάκρυον] 16.191; ἔ. ὀδύνας allay, assuage them, Il.11.848;

    ἔσχε κῦμα Od.5.451

    ;

    σιγῇ μῦθον 19.502

    (so

    εἶχε σιγῇ καὶ ἔφραζε οὐδενί Hdt.9.93

    );

    ἐν φρεσὶ μῦθον Od.15.445

    ; στόμα σῖγα, ἐν ἡσυχίᾳ, E.Hipp. 660, Fr.773.61 (lyr.);

    πόδα Id.IT 1159

    ; πόδα ἔξω or ἐκτός τινος ἔχειν, v. πούς:—[voice] Pass.,

    οὖρα σχεθέντα Aret.SA 2.5

    .
    10 keep away from, c. gen.rei, τινὰ ἀγοράων, νεῶν, Il.2.275, 13.687;

    γόων S.El. 375

    ;

    φόνου E.HF 1005

    : c.inf.,

    ἦ τινα.. σχήσω ἀμυνέμεναι Il.17.182

    ; stop, hinder from doing,

    τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι X. An.3.5.11

    , cf. HG4.8.5;

    ἔσχον μὴ κτανεῖν E.Andr. 686

    , cf. Hdt.1.158, etc.;

    μὴ οὐ τάδ' ἐξειπεῖν E.Hipp. 658

    ; ὥστε μή .. X.An.3.5.11;

    τὸ μὴ ἀδικεῖν A.Eu. 691

    , cf. Hdt.5.101: also c. part.,

    ἔ. τινὰ βουθυτοῦντα S.OC 888

    (troch.);

    μαργῶντα E.Ph. 1156

    .
    11 keep back, withhold a thing,

    ὅς οἱ χρήματα εἶχε βίῃ Od.15.231

    , cf. D.30.14;

    Ἕκτορ' ἔχει.. οὐδ' ἀπέλυσεν Il.24.115

    , cf. 136; αὐτὸς ἔχε pray keep it, a civil form of declining, E.Cyc. 270.
    12 hold in guard, keep safe, Il.24.730; of armour, protect, 22.322.
    13 with predicate, keep in a condition or place,

    εἶχον ἀτρέμας σφέας αὐτούς Hdt.9.54

    , cf. 53, Ar.Th. 230;

    ἔ. ἑωυτοὺς κατ' οἴκους Hdt.3.79

    ;

    σαυτὸν ἐκποδών A.Pr. 346

    , cf. X.Cyr.6.1.37;

    σῖγα νάπη φύλλ' εἶχε E.Ba. 1085

    ;

    τοὺς στρατιώτας πολὺν χρόνον πειθομένους ἔ. X.Cyr.7.2.11

    .
    14 hold, consider,

    τινὰ θέᾳ ἰκέλαν Sapph. Supp.25.3

    (dub.), cf. E.Supp. 164;

    τινὰ ὡς προφήτην Ev.Matt.14.5

    ;

    τινὰ ὅτι προφήτης ἦν Ev.Marc.11.32

    ;

    ἔχε με παρῃτημένον Ev.Luc.14.18

    , cf.POxy.292.6 (i A.D.).
    III c.inf., have means or power to do, to be able, c. [tense] aor. inf., Il.7.217, 16.110, etc.: c. [tense] pres. inf., Od.18.364, etc.;

    πόλλ' ἂν λέγειν ἔχοιμι S.Ph. 1047

    : sts. with inf. omitted or supplied from context, ἀλλ' οὔ πως ἔτι εἶχε he could not, Il.17.354; οἷά κ' ἔχωμεν so far as we be able, Od.15.281;

    ἐξ οἵων ἔχω S.El. 1379

    ;

    ὅσον εἶχες E.IA 1452

    ;

    ὡς ἔχω Id.Hec. 614

    .
    b have to face, be obliged,

    παθεῖν Porph. Chr.63

    ;

    εἰ ἕξω βλαβῆναι Astramps.Orac.p.5

    H.;

    βάπτισμα ἔχω βαπτισθῆναι Ev.Luc.12.50

    .
    2 after Hom., οὐκ ἔχω, folld. by a dependent clause, I know not..,

    οὐκ εἶχον τίς ἂν γενοίμαν A.Pr. 905

    , cf. Isoc.12.130;

    οὐδ' ἔχω πῶς με χρὴ.. ἀφανίσαι S.OC 1710

    ;

    οὐκ ἔχων ὅ τι χρὴ λέγειν X.Cyr.1.4.24

    ;

    οὐκ ἔχω ποῖ πέσω S.Tr. 705

    ;

    ὅπως μολούμεθ' οὐκ ἔχω Id.OC 1743

    ; the two constructions combined,

    οὐ γὰρ εἴχομεν οὔτ' ἀντιφωνεῖν οὔθ' ὅπως.. πράξαιμεν Id.Ant. 270

    .
    IV impers. c. acc., there is.. (as in Mod. Gr.),

    ἔχει δὲ φυλακτήριον πρὸς τὸ μή σε καταπεσεῖν PMag.Par.1.2505

    , cf. 1262, 1840.
    B intrans., hold oneself, i.e. keep, so and so, ἔχον [οὕτως], ὥς τε τάλαντα γυνή (sc. ἔχει) kept balanced, like the scales which.., Il.12.433; ἕξω δ' ὡς ὅτε τις στερεὴ λίθος I will keep unmoved, as a stone.., Od.19.494, cf. Il.13.679, 24.27;

    νωλεμέως ἐχέμεν 5.492

    ; ἔγχος ἔχ' ἀτρέμας it kept still, 13.557; σχὲς οὗπερ εἶ keep where thou art, S.OC 1169;

    ἕξειν κατὰ χώραν Ar.Ra. 793

    , cf. Hdt.6.42, X.Oec.10.10; διὰ φυλακῆς ἔχοντες to keep on their guard, Th.2.81; ἔχε ἠρέμα keep still, Pl.Cra. 399e, etc.; ἔχε δή stay now, Id.Prt. 349e, Grg. 460a, etc.;

    ἔχ' αὐτοῦ D.45.26

    .
    6
    3 c. gen., keep from,

    πολέμου Th.1.112

    (cf. c. IV).
    4 with Preps., to be engaged or busy,

    ἀμφί τι A.Th. 102

    (lyr.), X.An.5.2.26, etc.;

    περί τινας Id.HG7.4.28

    .
    II simply, be,

    ἑκὰς εἶχον Od.12.435

    ;

    ἔ. κατ' οἴκους Hdt.6.39

    ;

    περὶ πολλῶν ἔ. πρηγμάτων Id.3.128

    ; ἀγῶνα διὰ πάσης ἀγωνίης ἔχοντα consisting in.., Id.2.91;

    ἔ. ἐν ἀνάγκαισι E.Ba. 88

    (lyr.);

    ὅπου συμφορᾶς ἔχεις Id.El. 238

    ;

    ἐκποδὼν ἔχειν Id.IT 1226

    , etc.
    2 freq. with Advbs. of manner,

    εὖ ἔχει Od.24.245

    , etc.; καλῶς ἔχει, κακῶς ἔχει, it is, is going on well or ill, v. καλός, κακός (but [tense] fut. σχήσειν καλῶς will turn out well, D.1.9, cf. 18.45;

    εὖ σχήσει S.Aj. 684

    ); οὕτως.. σχεῖν to turn out, happen thus, Pl.Ap. 39b; οὕτως ἔχει so the case stands, Ar.Pl. 110; οὕτως ἐχόντων, Lat. cum res ita se habeant, X.An.3.2.10;

    ὡς ὧδ' ἐχόντων S.Aj. 981

    ;

    οὕτω χρὴ διὰ στέρνων ἔχειν Id.Ant. 639

    ;

    οὕτως ἔ. περί τινος X.Mem.4.8.7

    , cf. Hdt.6.16;

    πρός τι D. 9.45

    ;

    τῇδ' ἔ. S.Ph. 1336

    ;

    κοσμίως ἔ. Ar.Th. 854

    ;

    ἥδιον ἔ. πρός τινας D.9.63

    ; ὡς εἶχε just as he was, Hdt.1.114;

    ὥσπερ εἶχε Th.1.134

    , X. HG4.1.30; ὡς ἔχω how I am, Ar.Lys. 610;

    ὥσπερ ἔχομεν Th.3.30

    ;

    τἀναντία εἶχεν D.9.41

    ; ἀσφαλέως, ἀναγκαίως ἔχει, = ἀσφαλές, ἀναγκαῖόν ἐστι, Hdt.1.86,9.27; καλῶς ἔχει no, I thank you, v. καλός.
    b c. gen. modi, εὖ ἔ. τινός to be well off for a thing, abound in it; καλῶς ἔ. μέθης to be well off for drink, i.e. to be pretty well drunk, Hdt. 5.20; σπόρου ἀνακῶς ἐ. to be busy with sowing, Id.8.109; εὖ ἐ. φρενῶν, σώματος, E.Hipp. 462, Pl.R. 404d;

    εὖ ὥρας ἔχον χωρίον Poll.5.108

    ; cf. ἥκω; so ὡς ποδῶν εἶχον as fast as they could go, Hdt.6.116, 9.59;

    ὡς τάχεος εἶχε ἕκαστος Id.8.107

    ;

    ὡς.. τις εὐνοίας ἢ μνήμης ἔχοι Th.1.22

    ;

    ὡς ὀργῆς ἔχω S.OT 345

    , cf. E.Hel. 313, 857, etc.; πῶς ἔχεις δόξης; Pl.R. 456d;

    οὕτω τρόπου ἔχεις X.Cyr.7.5.56

    ;

    μετρίως ἔ. βίου Hdt.1.32

    ;

    ὑγιεινῶς ἔ. αὐτὸς αὑτοῦ καὶ σωφρόνως Pl.R. 571d

    ;

    οὐκ εὖ σεαυτοῦ τυγχάνεις ἔχων Philem.4.11

    : also c. acc.,

    εὖ ἔ. τὸ σῶμα καὶ τὴν ψυχήν Pl.Grg. 464a

    , cf. X.Oec.21.7: c. dat.,

    οὕτως ἐχόντων τούτων τῇ φύσει D.18.315

    ;

    πῶς ἔχετε ταῖς διανοίαις Lycurg.75

    ;

    τῇ λέξει κακῶς ἔ. Isoc.9.10

    .
    III of direction, hold or turn towards, v. supr. A.11.8.
    3 lead towards,

    ὁδοὶ ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμὸν ἔ. Hdt.1.180

    , cf. 191, 2.17; ἔ. εἴς τι to be directed, point towards,

    ἔχθρης ἐχούσης ἐς Ἀθηναίους Id.5.81

    ; τὸ ἐς τοὺς Ἀργείους ἔχον what concerns them, Id.6.19; ταῦτα ἐς τὴν ἀπόστασιν ἔχοντα ib.2, etc.; of Place, extend, reach to,

    ἐπ' ὅσον ἔποψις τοῦ ἱροῦ εἶχε Id.1.64

    .
    4 ἐπί τινι ἔ. have hostile feelings to wards.., Id.6.49, S.Ant. 987 (lyr.).
    IV after Hom., ἔχω as auxiliary, c. [tense] aor. part. giving a perfect sense,

    κρύψαντες ἔχουσι Hes.Op.42

    ;

    ἀποκληΐσας ἔχεις Hdt.1.37

    ;

    ἐγκλῄσασ' ἔχει Ar.Ec. 355

    , cf. Th. 706; freq. in S.,

    θαυμάσας ἔχω OC 1140

    , cf. Ant.22, al.: also in late Prose,

    ἀναλώσας ἔχεις Aristid. Or.18(20).1

    ;

    ὅς σφε νῦν ἀτιμάσας ἔχει E.Med.33

    : less freq. c. [tense] pf. part., S.OT 701, Ph. 600, X.An.1.3.14,4.7.1: rarely c. [tense] pres. part.,

    πατρίδα καταστένουσ' ἔχεις E.Tr. 318

    (lyr.), cf. X.Cyn.10.11.
    2 part. ἔχων, with [tense] pres., adds a notion of duration to that of present action, τί κυπτάζεις ἔ.; why do you keep poking about there? Ar.Nu. 509; τί δῆτα διατρίβεις ἔ.; why then keep wasting time? Id.Ec. 1151; τί γὰρ ἕστηκ' ἔ.; ib. 853, cf. Th. 473, 852: without interrog., φλυαρεῖς ἔ., ἔ. φλυαρεῖς, you keep chattering, Pl.Grg. 490e, Euthd. 295c;

    κακοῦν ἔχοντ' αὐτὸν ἀποκτιννύναι D.23.35

    (and so possibly

    ἐνεργεῖ ἔ. Arist.Metaph. 1072b23

    );

    παίσδεις ἔ. Theoc.14.8

    : so in later Prose,

    παίζεις ἔ. Luc. Icar.24

    ; but ῥιπτεῖς ἔ.; do you throw away the prize when it is in your grasp? Aristid.1.443 J.
    C [voice] Med., hold oneself fast, cling closely,

    τῷ προσφὺς ἐχόμην Od. 12.433

    , cf. Il.1.513, etc.;

    πρὸς ἀλλήλῃσιν Od.5.329

    : mostly c. gen., hold on by, cling to, [ πέτρης] ib. 429;

    χερσὶν ἀώτου 9.435

    ;

    βρετέων A. Th.98

    (lyr.);

    ἑξόμεσθάσου Ar.Pl. 101

    ; τῆς πληγῆς ἔχ εται claps his hand on the place struck, D.4.40.
    2 metaph., cleave, cling to,

    ἔργου Hdt. 8.11

    , X.HG7.2.19;

    γεωργίας BGU7.6

    (iii A.D.);

    τῶν πραγμάτων Jul. Or.1.19a

    ; βιοτᾶς, ἐλπίδος, E. Ion 491, Fr. 409;

    τῆς αὐτῆς γνώμης Th.1.140

    ; lay hold on, take advantage of,

    τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἔχεο Thgn.32

    ;

    προφάσιος ἔχεσθαι Hdt.6.94

    ; fasten upon, attack, D.18.79; lay claim to,

    ἀμφοτέρων τῶν ἐπωνυμιέων Hdt.2.17

    ; to be zealous for, [ μάχης] S.OC 424;

    ἀληθείας Pl.Lg. 709c

    ;

    κοινῇ τῆς σωτηρίας X.An.6.3.17

    , etc.
    3 come next to, follow closely, ib.1.8.4;

    ἕπεσθαι ἐχομένους ὅτι μάλιστα τῶν ἁρμάτων Id.Cyr.7.1.9

    ; of peoples or places, to be close, border on, c. gen., Hdt.4.169, Th.2.96, etc.; freq. in part., τὴν ἐχομένην [τῶν νεωρίων] στοάν Aen. Tact.11.3; οἱ ἐ. the neighbouring people, Hdt.1.134; ὁ ἐχόμενος the next man, Aen.Tact.22.27; of Time, τὸ ἐχόμενον ἔτος the next year, Th.6.3;

    ὁ ἐ. διαλογισμός PRev.Laws 16.15

    (iii B.C.); τὰ ἐχόμενα τούτοις what follows, Pl.Grg. 494e (without

    τούτοις Isoc.6.29

    ).
    4 depend,

    ἔκ τινος Od.6.197

    , 11.346: c. gen.,

    σέο δ' ἕξεται Il.9.102

    .
    5 pertain to,

    ὅσα ἔχεται τῶν αἰσθήσεων Pl.Lg. 661b

    ;

    ἃ διδασκάλων εἴχετο Id.Prt. 319e

    ;

    ὅσα τέχνης ἔχεται Id.Men. 94b

    , etc.: esp. in Hdt. in periphrases, τὰ τῶν ὀνειράτων, καρπῶν ἐχόμενα, 1.120, 193;

    ὀρνίθων ἢ ἰχθύων 2.77

    ; σιτίων, ἐσθῆτος, 3.25,66.
    III maintain oneself, hold one's ground, 12.126;

    ἔχεο κρατερῶς 16.501

    .
    2 c. acc., keep off from oneself, repel, 17.639 (unless σχήσεσθαι is [voice] Pass., cf. 9.235).
    IV keep oneself back, abstain or refrain from, ἀϋτῆς, μάχης, 2.98, 3.84;

    βίης Od.4.422

    ;

    ἐχώμεθα δηϊοτῆτος ἐκ βελέων Il.14.129

    ;

    τῆς ἀγωγῆς Hdt.6.85

    ;

    τῆς τιμωρίης Id.7.169

    ;

    τῶν ἀθίκτων S.OT 891

    (lyr., s.v.l.): c.inf., A.R.1.328;

    οὐκ ἂν ἐσχόμην τὸ μὴ ἀποκλῇσαι S.OT 1387

    ; κακῶν ἄπο χεῖρας ἔχεσθαι to keep one's hands from ill, Od.22.316;

    Μενέλεω σχέσθαι χέρα E.Rh. 174

    : abs., σχέο, σχέσθε, hold! cease! Il.21.379, 22.416.
    ------------------------------------
    ἔχω (B),
    A bear, carry, bring, imper.

    ϝεχέτω Schwyzer 686.24

    (Pamphyl., iv B. C.): [ per.] 3sg. [tense] aor. 1

    ἔϝεξε

    brought as an offering,

    Inscr.Cypr. 66

    H. (Cf. Skt. váhati, Lat. veho, Γαιάϝοχος.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἔχω

  • 4 υἱός

    υἱός, οῦ, ὁ (Hom.+; loanw. in rabb.) prim. ‘son’
    a male who is in a kinship relationship either biologically or by legal action, son, offspring, descendant
    the direct male issue of a person, son τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:21; GJs 14:2 (cp. Mel., P. 8, 53 ὡς γὰρ υἱὸς τεχθείς). Cp. Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14) and 25; 10:37 (w. θυγάτηρ); Mk 12:6a; Lk 1:13, 31, 57; 11:11; 15:11 (on this JEngel, Die Parabel v. Verlorenen Sohn: ThGl 18, 1926, 54–64; MFrost, The Prodigal Son: Exp. 9th ser., 2, 1924, 56–60; EBuonaiuti, Religio 11, ’35, 398–402); Ac 7:29; Ro 9:9 (cp. Gen 18:10); Gal 4:22 al. W. gen. Mt 7:9; 20:20f; 21:37ab; Mk 6:3; 9:17; Lk 3:2; 4:22; 15:19; J 9:19f; Ac 13:21; 16:1; 23:16; Gal 4:30abc (Gen 21:10abc); Js 2:21; AcPlCor 2:29. Also ἐγὼ Φαρισαῖός εἰμι υἱὸς Φαρισαίων Ac 23:6 is prob. a ref. to direct descent. μονογενὴς υἱός (s. μονογενής 1) Lk 7:12. ὁ υἱὸς ὁ πρωτότοκος (πρωτότοκος 1) 2:7.
    the immediate male offspring of an animal (Ps 28:1 υἱοὺς κριῶν; Sir 38:25. So Lat. filius: Columella 6, 37, 4) in our lit. only as foal ἐπὶ πῶλον υἱὸν ὑποζυγίου Mt 21:5 (cp. Zech 9:9 πῶλον νέον).
    human offspring in an extended line of descent, descendant, son Ἰωσὴφ υἱὸς Δαυίδ Mt 1:20 (cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 73); s. 2dα below. υἱοὶ Ἰσραήλ (Ἰσραήλ 1) Mt 27:9; Lk 1:16; Ac 5:21; 7:23, 37; 9:15; 10:36; Ro 9:27; 2 Cor 3:7, 13; Hb 11:22 al.; AcPlCor 2:32. οἱ υἱοὶ Λευί (Num 26:57) Hb 7:5. υἱὸς Ἀβραάμ Lk 19:9. υἱοὶ Ἀδάμ 1 Cl 29:2 (Dt 32:8). υἱοι Ῥουβήλ GJs 6:3.
    one who is accepted or legally adopted as a son (Herodian 5, 7, 1; 4; 5; Jos, Ant. 2, 263; 20, 150) Ac 7:21 (cp. Ex 2:10).—J 19:26.
    a pers. related or closely associated as if by ties of sonship, son, transf. sense of 1
    of a pupil, follower, or one who is otherw. a spiritual son (SIG 1169, 12 οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ θεοῦ=the pupils and helpers [40] of Asclepius; sim. Maximus Tyr. 4, 2c; Just., D. 86, 6 οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν προφητῶν.—Some combination w. παῖδες is the favorite designation for those who are heirs of guild-secrets or who are to perpetuate a skill of some kind: Pla., Rep. 3, 407e, Leg. 6, 769b; Dionys. Hal., Comp. Verbi 22 p. 102, 4 Us./Rdm. ῥητόρων παῖδες; Lucian, Anach. 19, Dial. Mort. 11, 1 Χαλδαίων π.=dream-interpreters, Dips. 5 ἱατρῶν π., Amor. 49; Himerius, Or. 48 [=Or. 14], 13 σοφῶν π.): the ‘sons’ of the Pharisees Mt 12:27; Lk 11:19. Peter says Μᾶρκος ὁ υἱός μου 1 Pt 5:13 (perh. w. a component of endearment; s. Μᾶρκος). As a familiar form of address by a cherished mentor Hb 12:5 (Pr 3:11; ParJer 5:28; 7:24). υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες B 1:1.
    of the individual members of a large and coherent group (cp. the υἷες Ἀχαιῶν in Homer; also PsSol 2:3 οἱ υἱοὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ; Dio Chrys. 71 [21], 15; LXX) οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 Cl 8:3 (scripture quot. of unknown origin). υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραάμ Ac 13:26. οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων (Gen 11:5; Ps 11:2, 9; 44:3; TestLevi 3:10; TestZeb 9:7; GrBar 2:4) the sons of men=humans (cp. dγ below) Mk 3:28; Eph 3:5; 1 Cl 61:2 (of the earthly rulers in contrast to the heavenly king).
    of one whose identity is defined in terms of a relationship with a person or thing
    α. of those who are bound to a personality by close, non-material ties; it is this personality that has promoted the relationship and given it its character: son(s) of: those who believe are υἱοὶ Ἀβραάμ, because Abr. was the first whose relationship to God was based on faith Gal 3:7. In a special sense the devout, believers, are sons of God, i.e., in the light of the social context, people of special status and privilege (cp. PsSol 17:27; Just., D, 124, 1; Dio Chrys. 58 [75], 8 ὁ τοῦ Διὸς ὄντως υἱός; Epict. 1, 9, 6; 1, 3, 2; 1, 19, 9; Sextus 58; 60; 135; 376a; Dt 14:1; Ps 28:1; 72:15; Is 43:6 [w. θυγατέρες μου]; 45:11; Wsd 2:18; 5:5; 12:21 al.; Jdth 9:4, 13; Esth 8:12q; 3 Macc 6:28; SibOr 3, 702) Mt 5:45; Lk 6:35; Ro 8:14, 19 (‘Redeemer figures’ EFuchs, Die Freiheit des Glaubens, ’49, 108; against him EHommel in ThViat 4, ’52, 118, n. 26); 9:26 (Hos 2:1); 2 Cor 6:18 (w. θυγατέρες, s. Is 43:6 cited above); Gal 3:26 (cp. PsSol 17:27); 4:6a, 7ab (here the υἱός is the κληρονόμος and his opposite is the δοῦλος); Hb 2:10 (JKögel, Der Sohn u. die Söhne: Eine exeget. Studie zu Hb 2:5–18, 1904); 12:5–8 (in vs. 8 opp. νόθος, q.v.); Rv 21:7; 2 Cl 1:4; B 4:9. Corresp. there are sons of the devil (on this subj. cp. Hdb. on J 8:44) υἱὲ διαβόλου Ac 13:10. οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ πονηροῦ (masc.) Mt 13:38b. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἐν Ἅιδου ApcPt Rainer. In υἱοί ἐστε τῶν φονευσάντων τοὺς προφήτας Mt 23:31 this mng. is prob. to be combined w. sense 1c. The expr. υἱοὶ θεοῦ Mt 5:9 looks to the future (s. Betz, SM ad loc.; cp. KKöhler, StKr 91, 1918, 189f). Lk 20:36a signifies a status akin to that of angels (Ps 88:7; θεῶν παῖδες as heavenly beings: Maximus Tyr. 11, 5a; 12a; 13, 6a.—Hierocles 3, 424 the ἄγγελοι are called θεῶν παῖδες; HWindisch, Friedensbringer-Gottessöhne: ZNW 24, 1925, 240–60, discounts connection w. angels and contends for the elevation of the ordinary followers of Jesus to the status of Alexander the Great in his role as an εἰρηνηποιός [cp. Plut., Mor. 329c]; for measured critique of this view s. Betz, SM 137–42.).
    β. υἱός w. gen. of thing, to denote one who shares in it or who is worthy of it, or who stands in some other close relation to it, oft. made clear by the context; this constr. is prob. a Hebraism in the main, but would not appear barbaric (B-D-F §162, 6; Mlt-H. 441; Dssm., B p. 162–66 [BS 161–66]; PASA II 1884, no. 2 υἱὸς πόλεως [time of Nero; on this type of formulation SEG XXXIX, 1864]; IMagnMai 167, 5; 156, 12) οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου (αἰών 2a) Lk 16:8a (opp. οἱ υἱοί τοῦ φωτός vs. 8b); 20:34. τῆς ἀναστάσεως υἱοί (to Mediterranean publics the functional equivalent of ἀθάνατοι ‘immortals’; cp. ἀνάστασις 2b) 20:36b. υἱοὶ τῆς ἀνομίας (ἀνομία 1; cp. CD 6:15) Hv 3, 6, 1; ApcPt 1:3; τῆς ἀπειθείας (s. ἀπείθεια) Eph 2:2; 5:6; Col 3:6; τῆς ἀπωλείας ApcPt 1:2. ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας of Judas the informer J 17:12 (cp. similar expressions in Eur., Hec. 425; Menand., Dyscolus 88f: s. FDanker, NTS 7, ’60/61, 94), of the end-time adversary 2 Th 2:3. υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας (βασιλεία 1bη; s. SEG XXXIX, 1864 for related expressions) Mt 8:12; 13:38a. υἱοὶ βροντῆς Mk 3:17 (s. Βοανηργές). υἱὸς γεέννης (s. γέεννα) Mt 23:15; τ. διαθήκης (PsSol 17:15) Ac 3:25; εἰρήνης Lk 10:6. υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος (s. νυμφών) Mt 9:15; Mk 2:19; Lk 5:34. υἱὸς παρακλήσεως Ac 4:36 (s. Βαρναβᾶς). υἱοὶ (τοῦ) φωτός (Hippol., Ref. 6, 47, 4 in gnostic speculation) Lk 16:8b (opp. υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου); J 12:36. υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 Th 5:5 (EBuonaiuti, ‘Figli del giorno e della luce’ [1 Th 5:5]: Rivista storico-critica delle Scienze teol. 6, 1910, 89–93).
    in various combinations as a designation of the Messiah and a self-designation of Jesus
    α. υἱὸς Δαυίδ son of David of the Messiah (PsSol 17:21) Mt 22:42–45; Mk 12:35–37; Lk 20:41–44; B 12:10c. Specif. of Jesus as Messiah Mt 1:1a; 9:27; 12:23; 15:22; 20:30f; 21:9, 15; Mk 10:47f; Lk 18:38f.—WWrede, Jesus als Davidssohn: Vorträge u. Studien 1907, 147–77; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 4, Rel.3 226f; ELohmeyer, Gottesknecht u. Davidssohn ’45, esp. 68; 72; 77; 84; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 251–56; WMichaelis, Die Davidsohnschaft Jesu usw., in D. histor. Jesus u. d. kerygm. Christus, ed. Ristow and Matthiae, ’61, 317–30; LFisher, ECColwell Festschr. ’68, 82–97.
    β. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, υἱὸς θεοῦ (the) Son of God (for the phrase s. JosAs 6:2 al. Ἰωσὴφ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ; there is no undisputed evidence of usage as messianic title in pre-Christian Judaism [s. Dalman, Worte 219–24, Eng. tr. 268–89; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 53f; EHuntress, ‘Son of God’ in Jewish Writings Prior to the Christian Era: JBL 54, ’35, 117–23]; cp. 4Q 246 col. 2, 1 [JFitzmyer, A Wandering Aramean ’79, 90–93; JCollins, BRev IX/3, ’93, 34–38, 57]. Among polytheists on the other hand, sons of the gods in a special sense [s. Just., A I, 21, 1f] are not only known to myth and legend, but definite historical personalities are also designated as such. Among them are famous wise men such as Pythagoras and Plato [HUsener, Das Weihnachtsfest2 1911, 71ff], and deified rulers, above all the Roman emperors since the time of Augustus [oft. in ins and pap: Dssm., B 166f=BS 166f, LO 294f=LAE 346f; Thieme 33]. According to Memnon [I B.C./ I A.D.]: 434 Fgm. 1, 1, 1 Jac., Clearchus [IV B.C.] carried his boasting so far as Διὸς υἱὸν ἑαυτὸν ἀνειπεῖν. Also, persons who were active at that time as prophets and wonder-workers laid claim to the title υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ, e.g. the Samaritan Dositheus in Origen, C. Cels. 6, 11; sim. an Indian wise man who calls himself Διὸς υἱός Arrian, Anab. 7, 2, 3; cp. Did., Gen. 213, 18 ὁ Ἀβρὰμ υἱὸς θεοῦ διὰ δικαιοσύνην. S. GWetter, ‘Der Sohn Gottes’ 1916; Hdb. exc. on J 1:34; s. also Clemen2 76ff; ENorden, Die Geburt des Kindes 1924, 75; 91f; 132; 156f; EKlostermann, Hdb. exc. on Mk 1:11 [4th ed. ’50]; M-JLagrange, Les origines du dogme paulinien de la divinité de Christ: RB 45, ’36, 5–33; HPreisker, Ntl. Zeitgesch. ’37, 187–208; HBraun, ZTK 54, ’57, 353–64; ANock, ‘Son of God’ in Paul. and Hellen. Thought: Gnomon 33, ’61, 581–90 [=Essays on Religion and the Anc. World II, ’72, 928–39]—originality in Paul’s thought): Ps 2:7 is applied to Jesus υἱός μου εἶ σύ, ἐγὼ σήμερον γεγέννηκά σε Lk 3:22 D; GEb 18, 37.—Ac 13:33; Hb 1:5a; 5:5; 1 Cl 36:4. Likew. Hos 11:1 (w. significant changes): Mt 2:15, and 2 Km 7:14: Hb 1:5b. The voice of God calls him ὁ υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός (s. ἀγαπητός 1) at his baptism Mt 3:17; Mk 1:11; Lk 3:22; GEb 18, 37 and 39 and at the Transfiguration Mt 17:5; Mk 9:7; Lk 9:35 (here ἐκλελεγμένος instead of ἀγαπ.); 2 Pt 1:17. Cp. J 1:34. The angel at the Annunciation uses these expressions in referring to him: υἱὸς ὑψίστου Lk 1:32; GJs 11:3 and υἱὸς θεοῦ Lk 1:35 (Ar. 15, 1 ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ὑψίστου. Cp. Just., A I, 23, 2 μόνος ἰδίως υἱὸς τῷ θεῷ γεγέννηται). The centurion refers to him at the crucifixion as υἱὸς θεοῦ Mt 27:54; Mk 15:39; GPt 11:45; cp. vs. 46 (CMann, ET 20, 1909, 563f; JPobee, The Cry of the Centurion, A Cry of Defeat: CFDMoule Festschr. ’70, 91–102; EJohnson, JSNT 31, ’87, 3–22 [an indefinite affirmation of Jesus]). The high priest asks εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστὸς ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 26:63 (DCatchpole, NTS 17, ’71, 213–26). Passers-by ask him to show that he is God’s Son 27:40; sim. the devil 4:3, 6; Lk 4:3, 9. On the other hand, evil spirits address him as the Son of God Mt 8:29; Mk 3:11; 5:7; Lk 4:41; 8:28; and disciples testify that he is Mt 14:33; 16:16. S. also Mk 1:1 (s. SLegg, Ev. Sec. Marc. ’35).—Jesus also refers to himself as Son of God, though rarely apart fr. the Fourth Gosp.: Mt 28:19 (the Risen Lord in the trinitarian baptismal formula); Mt 21:37f=Mk 12:6 (an allusion in the parable of the vinedressers).—Mt 27:43; Mk 13:32; Rv 2:18. The main pass. is the so-called Johannine verse in the synoptics Mt 11:27=Lk 10:22 (s. PSchmiedel, PM 4, 1900,1–22; FBurkitt, JTS 12, 1911, 296f; HSchumacher, Die Selbstoffenbarung Jesu bei Mt 11:27 [Lk 10:22] 1912 [lit.]; Norden, Agn. Th. 277–308; JWeiss, Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 120–29, Urchristentum 1917, 87ff; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 45ff; EMeyer I 280ff; RBultmann, Gesch. d. synopt. Trad.2 ’31, 171f; MDibelius, Die Formgeschichte des Evangeliums2 ’33, 259; MRist, Is Mt 11:25–30 a Primitive Baptismal Hymn? JR 15, ’35, 63–77; TArvedson, D. Mysterium Christi: E. Studie zu Mt 11:25–30, ’37; WDavies, ‘Knowledge’ in the Dead Sea Scrolls and Mt 11:25–30, HTR 45, ’53, 113–39; WGrundmann, Sohn Gottes, ZNW 47, ’56, 113–33; JBieneck, Sohn Gottes als Christusbez. der Synopt. ’51; PWinter, Mt 11:27 and Lk 10:22: NovT 1, ’56, 112–48; JJocz, Judaica 13, ’57, 129–42; OMichel/OBetz, Von Gott Gezeugt, Beih. ZNW [Jeremias Festschr.] 26, ’60, 3–23 [Qumran]).—Apart fr. the synoptics, testimony to Jesus as the Son of God is found in many parts of our lit. Oft. in Paul: Ro 1:3, 4, 9; 5:10; 8:3, 29, 32; 1 Cor 1:9; 15:28; 2 Cor 1:19; Gal 1:16; 2:20; 4:4; Eph 4:13; Col 1:13; 1 Th 1:10. Cp. Ac 9:20. In Hb: 1:2, 8; 4:14; 5:8; 6:6; 7:3, 28; 10:29. In greatest frequency in John (cp. Herm. Wr. 1, 6 the Λόγος as υἱὸς θεοῦ. Likew. Philo, Agr. 51 πρωτόγονος υἱός, Conf. Lingu. 146 υἱὸς θεοῦ.—Theoph. Ant. 2, 1 [p. 154, 12] ὁ λόγος ὁ τοῦ θεοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν καὶ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ; Iren. 3, 12, 2 [Harv. II 55, 2]): J 1:49; 3:16–18 (s. μονογενής 2), 35f; 5:19–26; 6:40; 8:35f; 10:36; 11:4, 27; 14:13; 17:1; 19:7; 20:31; 1J 1:3, 7; 2:22–24; 3:8, 23; 4:9f, 14f; 5:5, 9–13, 20; 2J 3, 9.—B 5:9, 11; 7:2, 9; 12:8; 15:5; Dg 7:4; 9:2, 4; 10:2 (τὸν υἱὸν αὐτοῦ τὸν μονογενῆ; also ApcEsdr 6:16 p. 31, 22 Tdf.; ApcSed 9:1f); IMg 8:2; ISm 1:1; MPol 17:3; Hv 2, 2, 8; Hs 5, 2, 6 (ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ὁ ἀγαπητός); 8; 11; 5, 4, 1; 5, 5, 2; 3; 5; 5, 6, 1; 2; 4; 7 (on the Christology of the Shepherd s. Dibelius, Hdb. on Hs 5, also ALink and JvWalter [πνεῦμα 5cα]); Hs 8, 3, 2; 8, 11, 1. Cp. 9, 1, 1; 9, 12, 1ff.—In trinitarian formulas, in addition to Mt 28:19, also IMg 13:1; EpilMosq 5; D 7:1, 3.—The deceiver of the world appears w. signs and wonders ὡς υἱὸς θεοῦ D 16:4 (ApcEsdr 4:27 p. 28, 32 Tdf. ὁ λέγων• Ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ [of Antichrist]).—EKühl, Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu 1907, 16–44; GVos, The Self-disclosure of Jesus 1926.—EBurton, ICC Gal 1921, 404–17; TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 211–36; MHengel, The Son of God (tr. JBowden) ’76; DJones, The Title υἱὸς θεοῦ in Acts: SBLSP 24, ’85, 451–63.
    γ. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου lit. ‘the son of the man’ (the pl. form οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων appears freq. in the LXX to render בְּנֵי אָדָם = mortals, e.g. Gen 11:5; Ps 10:4; 11:2; cp. ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπολείας J 17:12 [s. 2cβ]) ‘the human being, the human one, the man’ in our lit. only as a byname in ref. to Jesus and in an exclusive sense the Human One, the Human Being, one intimately linked with humanity in its primary aspect of fragility yet transcending it, traditionally rendered ‘the Son of Man.’ The term is found predom. in the gospels, where it occurs in the synoptics about 70 times (about half as oft. if parallels are excluded), and in J 12 times (s. EKlostermann, Hdb. exc. on Mk 8:31). In every case the title is applied by Jesus to himself. Nowhere within a saying or narrative about him is it found in an address to him: Mt 8:20; 9:6; 10:23; 11:19; 12:8, 32, 40; 13:37, 41; 16:13, 27f; 17:9, 12, 22; 18:10 [11] v.l.; 19:28; 20:18, 28; 24:27, 30, 37, 39, 44; 25:13 v.l., 31; 26:2, 24ab, 45, 64; Mk 2:10, 28; 8:31, 38; 9:9, 12, 31; 10:33, 45; 13:26; 14:21ab, 41, 62; Lk 5:24; 6:5, 22; 7:34; 9:22, 26, 44, 56 v.l., 58; 11:30; 12:8, 10, 40; 17:22, 24, 26, 30; 18:8, 31; 19:10; 21:27, 36; 22:22, 48, 69; 24:7.—John (FGrosheide, Υἱὸς τ. ἀνθρ. in het Evang. naar Joh.: TSt 35, 1917, 242–48; HDieckmann, D. Sohn des Menschen im J: Scholastik 2, 1927, 229–47; HWindisch, ZNW 30, ’31, 215–33; 31, ’32, 199–204; WMichaelis, TLZ 85, ’60, 561–78 [Jesus’ earthly presence]) 1:51; 3:13, 14; 5:27 (BVawter, Ezekiel and John, CBQ 26, ’64, 450–58); 6:27, 53, 62; 8:28; 9:35; 12:23, 34; 13:31. Whether the component of fragility (suggested by OT usage in ref. to the brief span of human life and the ills to which it falls heir) or high status (suggested by traditions that appear dependent on Da 7:13, which refers to one ‘like a human being’), or a blend of the two dominates a specific occurrence can be determined only by careful exegesis that in addition to extra-biblical traditions takes account of the total literary structure of the document in which it occurs. Much neglected in the discussion is the probability of prophetic association suggested by the form of address Ezk 2:1 al. (like the OT prophet [Ezk 3:4–11] Jesus encounters resistance).—On Israelite thought contemporary w. Jesus and alleged knowledge of a heavenly being looked upon as a ‘Son of Man’ or ‘Man’, who exercises Messianic functions such as judging the world (metaph., pictorial passages in En 46–48; 4 Esdr 13:3, 51f) s. Bousset, Rel.3 352–55; NMessel, D. Menschensohn in d. Bilderreden d. Hen. 1922; ESjöberg, Kenna 1 Henok och 4 Esra tanken på den lidande Människosonen? Sv. Ex. Årsb. 5, ’40, 163–83, D. Menschensohn im äth. Hen. ’46. This view is in some way connected w. Da 7:13; acc. to some it derives its real content fr. an eschatological tradition that ultimately goes back to Iran (WBousset, Hauptprobleme der Gnosis 1907, 160–223; Reitzenstein, Erlösungsmyst. 119ff, ZNW 20, 1921, 18–22, Mysterienrel.3 418ff; Clemen2 72ff; CKraeling, Anthropos and Son of Man: A Study in the Religious Syncretism of the Hellenistic Orient 1927); acc. to this tradition the First Man was deified; he will return in the last times and usher in the Kingdom of God.—Outside the gospels: Ac 7:56 (v.l. τοῦ θεοῦ; GKilpatrick, TZ 21, ’65, 209); Rv 1:13; 14:14 (both after Da 7:13; sim. allusion to Da in Just., D. 31, 1). The quot. fr. Ps 8:5 in Hb 2:6 prob. does not belong here, since there is no emphasis laid on υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου. In IEph 20:2 Jesus is described as υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου καὶ υἱὸς θεοῦ. Differently B 12:10 Ἰησοῦς, οὐχὶ υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου ἀλλὰ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ Jesus, not a man’s son, but Son of God.—HLietzmann, Der Menschensohn 1896; Dalman, Worte 191–219 (Eng. tr., 234–67); Wlh., Einl.2 123–30; PFiebig, Der Menschensohn 1901; NSchmidt, The Prophet of Nazareth 1905, 94–134, Recent Study of the Term ‘Son of Man’: JBL 45, 1926, 326–49; FTillmann, Der Menschensohn 1907; EKühl, Das Selbstbewusstsein Jesu 1907, 65ff; HHoltzmann, Das messianische Bewusstsein Jesu, 1907, 49–75 (lit.), Ntl. Theologie2 I 1911, 313–35; FBard, D. Sohn d. Menschen 1908; HGottsched, D. Menschensohn 1908; EAbbott, ‘The Son of Man’, etc., 1910; EHertlein, Die Menschensohnfrage im letzten Stadium 1911, ZNW 19, 1920, 46–48; JMoffatt, The Theology of the Gospels 1912, 150–63; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 5–22 (the titles of the works by Wernle and Althaus opposing his first edition [1913], as well as Bousset’s answer, are found s.v. κύριος, end); DVölter, Jesus der Menschensohn 1914, Die Menschensohnfrage neu untersucht 1916; FSchulthess, ZNW 21, 1922, 247–50; Rtzst., Herr der Grösse 1919 (see also the works by the same author referred to above in this entry); EMeyer II 335ff; HGressmann, ZKG n.s. 4, 1922, 170ff, D. Messias 1929, 341ff; GDupont, Le Fils d’Homme 1924; APeake, The Messiah and the Son of Man 1924; MWagner, Der Menschensohn: NKZ 36, 1925, 245–78; Guillaume Baldensperger, Le Fils d’Homme: RHPR 5, 1925, 262–73; WBleibtreu, Jesu Selbstbez. als der Menschensohn: StKr 98/99, 1926, 164–211; AvGall, Βασιλεία τοῦ θεοῦ 1926; OProcksch, D. Menschensohn als Gottessohn: Christentum u. Wissensch. 3, 1927, 425–43; 473–81; CMontefiore, The Synoptic Gospels2 1927 I 64–80; ROtto, Reich Gottes u. Menschensohn ’34, Eng. tr. The Kgdm. of God and the Son of Man, tr. Filson and Woolf2 ’43; EWechssler, Hellas im Ev. ’36, 332ff; PParker, The Mng. of ‘Son of Man’: JBL 60, ’41, 151–57; HSharman, Son of Man and Kingdom of God ’43; JCampbell, The Origin and Mng. of the Term Son of Man: JTS 48, ’47, 145–55; HRiesenfeld, Jésus Transfiguré ’47, 307–13 (survey and lit.); TManson, ConNeot 11, ’47, 138–46 (Son of Man=Jesus and his disciples in Mk 2:27f); GDuncan, Jesus, Son of Man ’47, 135–53 (survey); JBowman, ET 59, ’47/48, 283–88 (background); MBlack, ET 60, ’48f, 11–15; 32–36; GKnight, Fr. Moses to Paul ’49, 163–72 (survey); TNicklin, Gospel Gleanings ’50, 237–50; TManson (Da, En and gospels), BJRL 32, ’50, 171–93; TPreiss, Le Fils d’Homme: ÉThR 26/3, ’51, Life in Christ, ’54, 43–60; SMowinckel, He That Cometh, tr. Anderson, ’54, 346–450; GIber, Überlieferungsgesch. Unters. z. Begriff des Menschensohnes im NT, diss. Heidelb. ’53; ESjöberg, D. verborgene Menschensohn in den Ev. ’55; WGrundmann, ZNW 47, ’56, 113–33; HRiesenfeld, The Mythological Backgrd. of NT Christology, CHDodd Festschr. ’56, 81–95; PhVielhauer, Gottesreich u. Menschensohn in d. Verk. Jesu, GDehn Festschr. ’57, 51–79; ESidebottom, The Son of Man in J, ET 68, ’57, 231–35; 280–83; AHiggins, Son of Man- Forschung since (Manson’s) ‘The Teaching of Jesus’: NT Essays (TW Manson memorial vol.) ’59, 119–35; HTödt, D. Menschensohn in d. synopt. Überl. ’59 (tr. Barton ’65); JMuilenburg, JBL 79, ’60, 197–209 (Da, En); ESchweizer, JBL 79, ’60, 119–29 and NTS 9, ’63, 256–61; BvIersel, ‘Der Sohn’ in den synopt. Jesusworten, ’61 (community?); MBlack, BJRL 45, ’63, 305–18; FBorsch, ATR 45, ’63, 174–90; AHiggins, Jesus and the Son of Man, ’64; RFormesyn, NovT 8, ’66, 1–35 (barnasha=‘I’); SSandmel, HSilver Festschr. ’63, 355–67; JJeremias, Die älteste Schicht der Menschensohn-Logien, ZNW 58, ’67, 159–72; GVermes, MBlack, Aram. Approach3, ’67, 310–30; BLindars, The New Look on the Son of Man: BJRL 63, ’81, 437–62; WWalker, The Son of Man, Some Recent Developments CBQ 45, ’83, 584–607; JDonahue, Recent Studies on the Origin of ‘Son of Man’ in the Gospels, CBQ 48, ’86, 584–607; DBurkitt, The Nontitular Son of Man, A History and Critique: NTS 40, ’94 504–21 (lit.); JEllington, BT 40, ’89, 201–8; RGordon, Anthropos: 108–13.—B. 105; DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > υἱός

  • 5 λόγος

    λόγος, ου, ὁ (verbal noun of λέγω in the sense ‘pick’; Hom.+).
    a communication whereby the mind finds expression, word
    of utterance, chiefly oral.
    α. as expression, word (oratorical ability plus exceptional performance were distinguishing marks in Hellenic society, hence the frequent association of λ. and ἔργον ‘deed’; a sim. formulation as early as Il. 9, 443 μύθων τε ῥητῆρʼ ἔμεναι πρηκτῆρά τε ἔργων; Polystrat. p. 33 μὴ λόγῳ μόνον ἀλλʼ ἔργω; Just., A II, 4, 2 ἢ λόγῳ ἢ ἔργῳ and D. 35, 7 λόγον ἢ πρᾶξιν) δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ κ. λόγῳ, i.e. an exceptional personage Lk 24:19; pl. of Moses Ac 7:22 (the contrast expressed w. a verb Choix 20, 6–8 ποιεῖ ἀγαθὸν ὄτι δύναται καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ of Apollordorus, a benefactor in Cyzicus, a flourishing city in Phrygia; sim. New Docs 7, 233, no. 10, 8f πολιτευόμενος … λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ; cp. IKourion 32, 8; without contrast Diod S 13, 101, 3 ἄνδρας λόγῳ δυνατούς; for sim. constructions using λέγω and πράσσω s. Danker, Benefactor 339–43). Cp. Ro 15:18; 2 Cor 10:11; Col 3:17; 2 Th 2:17; Hb 13:21 v.l.; 1J 3:18 (cp. Theognis 1, 87f Diehl3 μή μʼ ἔπεσιν μὲν στέργε κτλ.—For the contrast λόγῳ … ἀληθείᾳ cp. Diod S 13, 4, 1). In contrast to a sinful deed we also have the λόγος ἁμαρτίας sinful word Judaicon 172, 9. W. γνῶσις: ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ κ. πάσῃ γνώσει 1 Cor 1:5. ἰδιώτης τῷ λόγῳ, ἀλλʼ οὐ τῇ γνώσει 2 Cor 11:6. (Opp. δύναμις ‘revelation of power’) 1 Cor 4:19, 20. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον οὐκ ἐγενήθη ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει 1 Th 1:5 (cp. Ar. 13, 7 of mythical accounts οὐδέν εἰσιν εἰ μὴ μόνον λόγοι ‘they’re nothing but words’). W. ἐπιστολή: 2 Th 2:2, 15. W. ἀναστροφή: 1 Ti 4:12; 1 Pt 3:1b. Opp. ‘be silent’: IRo 2:1.—μόνον εἰπὲ λόγῳ just say the word Mt 8:8; cp. Lk 7:7 (Ath. 17, 1 ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν; 29, 2; Phalaris, Ep. 121, 1 λόγῳ λέγειν; cp. schol. on Pla. 341a ἐν λόγῳ μόνον εἰπεῖν). οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ λόγον no one was able to answer him a (single) word Mt 22:46; cp. 15:23 (cp. TestAbr A 16 p. 98, 11 [Stone p. 44] οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ λόγον).— The (mighty) word (of one who performs miracles) ἐξέβαλεν τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ Mt 8:16 (a rare use of λ. as ‘single utterance’, s. L-S-J-M s.v. VII).—διὰ λόγου by word of mouth (opp. ‘by letter’) Ac 15:27.—In the textually uncertain pass. Ac 20:24 the text as it stands in N., οὐδενὸς λόγου (v.l. λόγον) ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν, may well mean: I do not consider my life worth a single word (cp. λόγου ἄξιον [ἄξιος 1a] and our ‘worth mention’; s. Conzelmann ad loc.).
    β. The expression may take on a variety of formulations or topical nuances: what you say Mt 5:37; statement (PGM 4, 334) Lk 20:20; question (Sext. Emp., Math. 8, 295; 9, 133; Diog. L. 2, 116) ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς λόγον I will ask you a question (cp. TestJob 36:5; GrBar 5:1; ApcSed 13:6; Jos., Ant. 12, 99) Mt 21:24; cp. Mk 11:29; Lk 20:3; prayer (PGM 1, 25; 4, 90; 179; 230 al.; 5, 180; 196 al.) Mt 26:44; Mk 14:39. ἡγούμενος τοῦ λ. principal speaker Ac 14:12. W. epexeget. gen. λ. παρακλήσεως 13:15. W. κήρυγμα our manner of presentation and our proclamation 1 Cor 2:4a (but s. comm.). (W. διδασκαλία) preaching 1 Ti 5:17; prophecy (Biogr. p. 364 [Pythia]) J 2:22; 18:32. Command (Aeschyl., Pers. 363) Lk 4:36; 2 Pt 3:5, 7; via a letter 2 Th 3:14. Report, story (X., An. 1, 4, 7; Diod S 3, 40, 9; 19, 110, 1 λ. διαδιδόναι=spread a report; Appian, Iber. 80 §346, Maced. 4 §1 [both=rumor]; Diod S 32, 15, 3 ἦλθεν ὁ λ. ἐπί τινα=the report came to someone; Arrian, Anab. 7, 22, 1 λόγος λέγεται τοιόσδε=a story is told like this, Ind. 9, 2; Diod S 3, 18, 3 λ.=story, account; Jos., Ant. 19, 132; Tat. 27, 2 τοῦ καθʼ Ἡρακλέα λόγου) Mt 28:15; Mk 1:45; Lk 5:15 (λ. περί τινος as X., An. 6, 6, 13; Jos., Ant. 19, 127) 7:17; J 21:23. ἠκούσθη ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τ. ἐκκλησίας the report came to the ears of the assembly in Jerusalem Ac 11:22. λόγον ἔχειν σοφίας have the appearance of wisdom, pass for wisdom Col 2:23 (cp. Pla., Epinomis 987b ἔχει λόγον; Demosth., C. Lept. 462 [20, 18] λόγον τινʼ ἔχον; but mng. 2f is possible). Proverb (Pla., Phdr. 17, 240c, Symp. 18, 195b, Gorg. 54, 499c, Leg. 6, 5, 757a; Socrat., Ep. 22, 1) J 4:37 (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 13, 7 ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ὁ λ. foll. by a proverb). Proclamation, instruction, teaching, message Lk 4:32; 10:39; J 4:41; 17:20; Ac 2:41; 4:4; 10:44; 20:7; 1 Cor 1:17; 2:1. In Ac18:15 ζητήματα περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου the sense appears to be someth. like this: controversial issues involving disputes about words and your way of life with λ. prob. referring to the presentation of controversial subjects, which in turn arouses heated ζητήματα debates. λόγος σοφίας proclamation of wisdom, speaking wisely 1 Cor 12:8a (Ps.-Phoc. 129 τῆς θεοπνεύστου σοφίης λ.); corresp. λ. γνώσεως vs. 8b. Cp. 14:9; 15:2; 2 Cor 1:18; 6:7; 10:10. λ. μαρτυρίας word of witness Rv 12:11. ὁ κατὰ τ. διδαχὴν πιστὸς λ. the message of faith, corresponding to the teaching Tit 1:9; the opp. 2 Ti 2:17. A speech (Aristot. p. 14b, 2; Diod S 40, 5a) διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ in a long speech Ac 15:32; cp. 20:2. λ. κολακείας flattering speech 1 Th 2:5. Speaking gener. 2 Cor 8:7; Eph 6:19; Col 4:6; D 2:5. ἐν λόγῳ πταίειν make a mistake in what one says Js 3:2.—Of God’s word, command, commission (LXX; ParJer 5:19 κατηχῆσαι αὐτοὺς τὸν λόγον; SyrBar 13:2; ApcSed 14:10; Just., D. 84, 2; Ael. Aristid. hears a ἱερὸς λ. at night fr. a god: 28, 116 K.=49, p. 529 D.; Sextus 24) ἠκυρώσατε τ. λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 15:6 (v.l. νόμον, ἐντολήν); cp. Mk 7:13.—J 5:38; 8:55; 10:35; Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6). Of God’s promise Ro 9:6, 9 (but these two vss., and Gal 5:14 below, prob. fit better under 2a), 28 (Is 10:22f). Cp. Hb 2:2; 4:2 (s. ἀκοή 4b); 7:28; 12:19. For B 15:1 see 1aδ. The whole law (as the expr. εἴ τι ἑτέρα ἐντολή indicates not limited to a narrow list of commandments), acc. to Ro 13:9. In what is prob. a play on words (s. 2a and b), Gal 5:14 (s. 2a below) is summed up in the λόγος as expressed in Lev 19:18.—That which God has created ἁγιάζεται διὰ λόγου θεοῦ 1 Ti 4:5; in line w. the context, this hardly refers to God’s creative word (so SibOr 3, 20; PtK 2; πάντα γὰρ λόγῳ ποιήσας ὁ θεός Theoph. Ant. 2, 18 [144, 8]), but to table prayers which use biblical expressions. The divine word as judge of thoughts Hb 4:12. τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 17:17; cp. 19:9.—Of the divine revelation through Christ and his messengers (Just., A I, 61, 9 λόγον … παρὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐμάθομεν τοῦτον) θεὸς ἐφανέρωσεν τὸν λ. αὐτοῦ ἐν κηρύγματι Tit 1:3. δέδωκα αὐτοῖς τὸν λ. σου J 17:14; cp. vss. 6, 17; 1J 1:10; 2:14. ἵνα μὴ ὁ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ βλασφημῆται Tit 2:5. The apostles and other preachers, w. ref. to the λόγος of God, are said to: λαλεῖν Ac 4:29, 31; 13:46; Phil 1:14; Hb 13:7; καταγγέλλειν Ac 13:5; 17:13; διδάσκειν 18:11; μαρτυρεῖν Rv 1:2. Of their hearers it is said: τὸν λ. τοῦ θεοῦ ἀκούειν Ac 13:7; δέχεσθαι 8:14; 11:1. Of the λ. τοῦ θεοῦ itself we read: ηὔξανεν Ac 6:7; 12:24; 19:20; οὐ δέδεται 2 Ti 2:9. In these places and many others ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ is simply the Christian message, the gospel: Lk 5:1; 8:11, 21; 11:28 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 1, 20 μὴ μόνον ἀκουόντων ἀλλὰ πασχόντων καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν λόγων=let the message have its effect on oneself); Ac 6:2 (s. καταλείπω 7c; for prob. commercial metaph. s. 2a below); 13:44 v.l. (for κυρίου); 16:32 v.l.; 1 Cor 14:36; 2 Cor 2:17; 4:2; Col 1:25; 1 Pt 1:23; Rv 1:9; 6:9; 20:4; IPhld 11:1. Cp. 1 Th 2:13ab; 1J 2:5.—Since this ‘divine word’ is brought to humanity through Christ, his word can be used in the same sense: ὁ λόγος μου J 5:24; cp. 8:31, 37, 43, 51f; 12:48; 14:23f; 15:3, 20b; Rv 3:8. ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Col 3:16; cp. Hb 6:1. ὁ λ. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 8:25; 12:24 v.l.; 13:44, 48f; 14:25 v.l.; 15:35, 36; 16:32 (cp. λ. θεοῦ); 19:10; 1 Th 1:8; 2 Th 3:1. Pl. Mk 8:38 (Lk 9:26); 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Lk 24:44; s. also 1aδ.—Or it is called simply ὁ λόγος=the ‘Word’, for no misunderstanding would be possible among Christians: Mt 13:20–23; Mk 2:2; 4:14–20, 33; 8:32 (s. 1aε below); 16:20; Lk 1:2; 8:12f, 15; Ac 6:4; 8:4; 10:36 (on the syntax s. FNeirynck, ETL 60, ’84, 118–23); 11:19; 14:25 (cp. λ. κυρίου above); 16:6; 17:11; 18:5; Gal 6:6; Phil 1:14; Col 4:3; 1 Th 1:6; 2 Ti 4:2; Js 1:21ff; 1 Pt 2:8; 3:1; 1J 2:7; AcPl Ha 7, 6 (so also Mel., HE 4, 26, 13; Ath. 2, 3).—Somet. the ‘Word’ is more closely defined by a gen.: ὁ λ. τῆς βασιλείας the word of the reign/rule (of God) Mt 13:19. τῆς σωτηρίας Ac 13:26. τῆς καταλλαγῆς 2 Cor 5:19. τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. δικαιοσύνης (q.v. 3a) Hb 5:13. ζωῆς Phil 2:16. (τῆς) ἀληθείας (Theoph. Ant. 3, 4 [p. 212, 2]; cp. περὶ ἀληθείας Hippol., Ref. 10, 6, 1) Eph 1:13; Col 1:5; 2 Ti 2:15; Js 1:18; AcPl Ha 8, 8 (Just., D. 121, 2). τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ κυρίου) Ac 14:3; 20:32. (Differently the pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. χάριτος gracious words Lk 4:22; cp. Marcellinus, Vi. Thu. 57 Hude λόγοι εἰρωνείας.) ὁ λ. τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ac 15:7; ὁ τοῦ Χριστιανισμοῦ λ. MPol 10:1. In Rv 3:10 the gospel is described by the ‘One who has the key of David’ as ὁ λ. τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου my word of endurance (W-S. §30, 12c). λ. τῶν ὑ[πο]μονῶν AcPl Ha 6, 11. παρελάβετε τὸν λ. ὅτι AcPl Ha 8, 25.—The pastoral letters favor the expr. πιστὸς ὁ λόγος (sc. ἐστίν, and s. πιστός 1b) 1 Ti 1:15; 3:1; 4:9; 2 Ti 2:11; Tit 3:8; cp. Rv 21:5; 22:6. λ. ὑγιής sound preaching Tit 2:8; cp. the pl. ὑγιαίνοντες λόγοι 2 Ti 1:13 (on medicinal use of words for the mind or soul s. VLeinieks, The City of Dionysos ’96, 115–22, on Eur.).—The pl. is also used gener. of Christian teachings, the words of the gospel Lk 1:4 (s. κατηχέω 2a); 1 Th 4:18. οἱ λ. τῆς πίστεως 1 Ti 4:6. On λόγοι κυριακοί for λόγια κυριακά in the title of the Papias document s. ἐξήγησις 2.—JSchniewind, Die Begriffe Wort und Evangelium bei Pls, diss. Bonn 1910; RAsting (εὐαγγέλιον, end).
    γ. of an individual declaration or remark: assertion, declaration, speech ἀκούσαντες τὸν λ. when they heard the statement Mt 15:12; cp. 19:11, 22; 22:15; Mk 5:36. διὰ τοῦτον τὸν λ. because of this statement of yours 7:29 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 29 [Stone p. 38] τὸν λ. τοῦτον; ApcMos 25 εἰς τὸν λόγον σου κρινῶ σε). Cp. 10:22; 12:13; Lk 1:29; 22:61 v.l. (for ῥήματος); J 4:39, 50; 6:60; 7:36, 40 v.l.; 15:20a; 18:9; 19:8; Ac 6:5; 7:29; 20:38; 22:22; 1 Th 4:15. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου whoever utters a (defamatory) word against the Son of Humanity Mt 12:32 (λ. εἰπεῖν κατά τινος as Jos., Ant. 15, 81); cp. Lk 12:10. λόγος σαπρός unwholesome talk Eph 4:29. λόγον ποιεῖσθαι make a speech Ac 11:2 D (cp. Hyperid. 3, 20; Jos., Ant. 11, 86).
    δ. the pl. (οἱ) λόγοι is used, on the one hand, of words uttered on various occasions, of speeches or instruction given here and there by humans or transcendent beings (TestAbr A 14 p. 94, 19 [Stone p. 36]; Jos., Ant. 4, 264; Just., D. 100, 3) ἐκ τῶν λόγων σου δικαιωθήσῃ (καταδικασθήσῃ) Mt 12:37ab; 24:35; Mk 13:31; Lk 21:33; Ac 2:40; 7:22 (ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ. On the word-deed pair cp. Dio Chrys. 4, 6 the λόγοι and ἔργα of Diogenes; s. α above). οἱ δέκα λόγοι the ten commandments (Ex 34:28; Dt 10:4; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 168, Decal. 32; Jos., Ant. 3, 138; cp. 91f; Did., Gen. 36, 10) B 15:1. Ac 15:24; 20:35; 1 Cor 2:4b, 13; 14:19ab; κενοὶ λ. Eph 5:6; AcPl Ox 6, 13 (cp. Aa 1, 241, 14); Dg 8:2; πλαστοὶ λ. 2 Pt 2:3. λ. πονηροί 3J 10.—Also of words and exprs. that form a unity, whether it be connected discourse (Jos., Ant. 15, 126; Just., A II, 12, 6, D. 11, 5; 81, 3 al.), a conversation, or parts of one and the same teaching, or expositions on the same subject (Diod S 16, 2, 3 μετέσχε τῶν Πυθαγορίων λόγων; Dio Chrys. 37 [54], 1; Ael. Aristid. 50, 55 K.=26 p. 519 D.: οἱ Πλάτωνος λόγοι; PsSol 17:43 [words of the Messiah]; AscIs 3:12 οἱ λόγοι τοῦ Βελχειρά) πᾶς ὅστις ἀκούει μου τοὺς λόγους τούτους Mt 7:24; cp. vss. 26, 28; 10:14; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 10:24; Lk 1:20; 6:47; 9:28, 44. ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς he questioned him at some length 23:9. τίνες οἱ λ. οὗτοι οὓς ἀντιβάλλετε; what is this conversation that you are holding? 24:17; J 7:40 (s. γ); 10:19; J 14:24a; 19:13; Ac 2:22; 5:5, 24; 16:36; 2 Ti 4:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 46:7. λόγοις φθοριμαίοις AcPlCor 1:2.
    ε. the subject under discussion, matter, thing gener. (Theognis 1055 Diehl; Hdt. 8, 65 μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ τὸν λόγον τοῦτον εἴπῃς. Cp. Hebr. דָּבָר) τὸν λ. ἐκράτησαν they took up the subject Mk 9:10; cp. Mt. 21:24 (s. 1aβ beg.). οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ you have no share in this matter Ac 8:21. ἰδεῖν περὶ τ. λόγου τούτου look into this matter 15:6. ἔχειν πρός τινα λόγον have a complaint against someone (cp. Demosth. 35, 55 ἐμοὶ πρὸς τούτους ὁ λόγος; PIand 16, 3 δίκαιον λόγον ἔχει πρὸς σέ) 19:38. παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (2d is also prob.).—Perh. also Mk 8:32 he discussed the subject quite freely (but s. 1aβ above).
    of literary or oratorical productions: of the separate books of a work (Hdt. 5, 36 ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ τ. λόγων; Pla., Parmen. 2, 127d ὁ πρῶτος λόγος; Philo, Omn. Prob. Lib. 1 ὁ μὲν πρότερος λόγος ἦν ἡμῖν, ὦ Θεόδοτε, περὶ τοῦ …) treatise Ac 1:1 (s. on the prologue to Ac: AHilgenfeld, ZWT 41, 1898, 619ff; AGercke, Her 29, 1894, 373ff; RLaqueur, Her 46, 1911, 161ff; Norden, Agn. Th. 311ff; JCreed, JTS 35, ’34, 176–82; Goodsp., Probs. 119–21). Παπίας … πέντε λόγους κυριακῶν λογίων ἔγραψεν Papias (11:1; cp. 3:1 e; 11:2; 12:2).—περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11. Hb is described as ὁ λ. τῆς παρακλήσεως a word of exhortation (in literary form) 13:22. Of writings that are part of Holy Scripture ὁ λ. Ἠσαί̈ου J 12:38. ὁ λ. ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γεγραμμένος 15:25; ὁ προφητικὸς λ. 2 Pt 1:19; 2 Cl 11:2 (quot. of unknown orig.); AcPl Ha 8, 27/BMM recto 35 (Just., D. 77, 2 al.). ὁ ἅγιος λ. the holy word 1 Cl 56:3. ὁ λ. ὁ γεγραμμένος 1 Cor 15:54 (Is 25:8 and Hos 13:14 follow). Pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. προφητῶν Ac 15:15. ὡς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ λόγων Ἠσαί̈ου Lk 3:4 (Pla., 7th Epistle 335a πείθεσθαι ἀεὶ χρὴ τοῖς παλαιοῖς καὶ ἱεροῖς λόγοις; TestJob 1:1 βίβλος λόγων Ἰώβ; ParJer 9:32 v.l. τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν λόγων Ἱερεμίου; ApcEsdr 1:1 καὶ ἀποκάλυψις τοῦ … Ἐσδράμ; ApcSed prol.; Just., D. 72, 3f).—Of the content of Rv: ὁ ἀναγινώσκων τ. λόγους τῆς προφητείας 1:3. οἱ λόγοι (τ. προφητείας) τ. βιβλίου τούτου 22:7, 9f, 18f.
    computation, reckoning
    a formal accounting, esp. of one’s actions, and freq. with fig. extension of commercial terminology account, accounts, reckoning λόγον δοῦναι (Hdt. 8, 100; X., Cyr. 1, 4, 3; Diod S 3, 46, 4; SIG 1099, 16; BGU 164, 21; Jos., Ant. 16, 120; Just., D. 115, 6) give account, make an accounting ἕκαστος περὶ ἑαυτοῦ λόγον δώσει τ. θεῷ Ro 14:12. Also λ. ἀποδοῦναι abs. (Just., D. 116, 1 al.; Diod S 16, 56, 4; 19, 9, 4) Hb 13:17. τινί to someone (Diod S 16, 27, 4; Plut., Alcib. 7, 3; Chariton 7, 6, 2; SIG 631, 13 τᾷ πόλει; 2 Ch 34:28; Da 6:3 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 209) τῷ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντι κρῖναι 1 Pt 4:5. τινὸς of someth. (SIG 1044, 46; 1105, 10 τοῦ ἀναλώματος; Jos., Ant. 19, 307) Lk 16:2 (here λ. w. the art.; on the subject of undergoing an audit cp. Aeschin. 3, 22). Likew. περί τινος (Diod S 18, 60, 2 δοὺς αὑτῷ περὶ τούτων λόγον=taking account [considering] with himself; BGU 98, 25 περὶ τούτου) Mt 12:36; Ac 19:40. ὑπέρ τινος concerning someone Hv 3, 9, 10.—αἰτεῖν τινα λόγον περί τινος call someone to account for someth. 1 Pt 3:15 (cp. Pla., Pol. 285e; Dio Chrys. 20 [37], 30; Apc4Esdr Fgm. b ἕκαστος ὑπὸ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔργου τὸν λόγον ἀπαιτηθήσεται; Just., A I, 17, 4. For another perspective s. d below.).—Of banking responsibility ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ (PStras 72, 10 [III A.D.] ὁ τῶν θεῶν λ.; PHerm 108 [III A.D.] λ. τοῦ Σαραπείου) in wordplay Ac 6:2 (w. τράπεζα q.v. 1c); s. also 1aβ.—Of a ledger heading (POxy 1333 [II/III A.D.] δὸς αὐτῳ λόγῳ θεωρικῶν=credit him under ‘festivals’; for others s. Preisig., Wörterbuch s.v. λ. 14; s. also Fachwörter 119) Ro 9:6 (the point is that God’s ‘list’ of Israelites is accurate; on ἐκπίπτω in the sense ‘is not deficient’ s. s.v. 4); vs. 9 (the ‘count’ is subsumed by metonymy in divine promise); Gal 5:14 (all moral obligations come under one ‘entry’: ‘you shall love your neighbor as yourself’; for commercial association of ἀναλίσκω vs. 15, which rounds out the wordplay, s. s.v.). The contexts of these three passages suggest strong probability for commercial associations; for another view s. 1aβ.
    settlement (of an account) (εἰς λόγον commercial t.t. ‘in settlement of an account’ POxy 275, 19; 21) εἰς λόγον δόσεως κ. λήμψεως in settlement of a mutual account (lit., ‘of giving and receiving’, ‘of debit and credit’) Phil 4:15 (cp. Plut., Mor. 11b λόγον δοῦναι καὶ λαβεῖν; a parallel formulation POxy 1134,10 [421 A.D.] λ. λήμματος καὶ ἐξοδιασμοῦ=ledger of income and expenditures); for the linked accounting terms δόσις and λήμψις s. PCairMasp 151, 208 [VI A.D.]. The same ideas are in the background of εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν credited to your account vs 17.—συναίρειν λόγον settle accounts (BGU 775, 18f. The mid. in the same mng. PFay109, 6 [I A.D.]; POxy 113, 27f.—Dssm., LO 94 [LAE 118f]) μετά τινος Mt 18:23; 25:19.
    reflection, respect, regard εἰς λόγον τινός with regard to, for the sake of (Thu. 3, 46, 4; Demosth. 19, 142 εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον; Polyb. 11, 28, 8; Ath. 31, 1; Ael. Aristid. 39 p. 743 D.: εἰς δεινότητος λ.) εἰς λ. τιμῆς IPhld 11:2. εἰς λ. θεοῦ ISm 10:1.
    reason for or cause of someth., reason, ground, motive (Just., D. 94, 3 δότε μοι λόγον, ὅτου χάριν … ; Ath. 30, 3 τὶς γὰρ … λόγος; Dio Chrys. 64 [14], 18 ἐκ τούτου τ. λόγου; Appian, Hann. 29 §126 τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 28, 155) τίνι λόγω; for what reason? Ac 10:29 (cp. Pla., Gorg. 512c τίνι δικαίῳ λ.; Appian, Mithrid. 57 §232 τίνι λόγῳ;). λόγον περὶ τῆς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐλπίδος 1 Pt 3:15 (but s. a above); κατὰ λόγον Ac 18:14 (s. κατά B 5bβ). παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (though 1aε is also poss.).
    πρὸς ὸ̔ν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος (ἐστίν) with whom we have to do (i.e. to reckon) (Dio Chrys. 31, 123; other exx. in FBleek, Hb II/1, 1836, 590ff), in his capacity as judge (Libanius, Legat. Ulixis [=Declamatio IV] 2 F. τοῖς δὲ ἀδίκως ἀποκτενοῦσι καὶ πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους ὁ λόγος γίγνεται) Hb 4:13. οὐ πρὸς σάρκα ὁ λόγος, ἀλλὰ πρὸς θεόν he has to do not with flesh, but with God IMg 3:2.
    In Col 2:23 (s. 1aβ) λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας may= make a case for wisdom (cp. λόγος ἡμῖν οὐδείς Plut., Mor. 870b).
    the independent personified expression of God, the Logos. Our lit. shows traces of a way of thinking that was widespread in contemporary syncretism, as well as in Jewish wisdom lit. and Philo, the most prominent feature of which is the concept of the Logos, the independent, personified ‘Word’ (of God): GJs 11:2 (word of the angel to Mary) συνλήμψῃ ἐκ Λόγου αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ πάντων Δεσπότου). J 1:1abc, 14 (cp. Just., A I, 23, 2; Mel., P. 9, 61 and oft. by all apolog., exc.. Ar.). It is the distinctive teaching of the Fourth Gospel that this divine ‘Word’ took on human form in a historical person, that is, in Jesus (s. RSeeberg, Festgabe für AvHarnack ’21, 263–81.—Λόγος w. ζωή in gnostic speculation: Iren.1, 1, 1 [Harv. 1, 10, 4]; Aelian, VH 4, 20 ἐκάλουν τὸν Πρωταγόραν Λόγον. Similarly Favorinus [II A.D.]: Vorsokr. 80 A 1 ln. 22 [in Diog. L. 9, 50] of Democritus: ἐκαλεῖτο Σοφία. Equating a divinity with an abstraction that she personifies: Artem. 5, 18 φρόνησις εἶναι νομίζεται ἡ θεός [Athena]). Cp. 1J 1:1; Rv 19:13. εἷς θεός ἐστιν, ὁ φανερώσας ἑαυτὸν διὰ Ἰ. Χριστοῦ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν αὐτοῦ λόγος, ἀπὸ σιγῆς προελθών there is one God, who has revealed himself through Jesus Christ his Son, who is his ‘Word’ proceeding from silence (i.e., without an oral pronouncement: in a transcendent manner) IMg 8:2 (s. σιγή). The Lord as νόμος κ. λόγος PtK 1. Cp. Dg 11:2, 3, 7, 8; 12:9.—HClavier, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 81–93: the Alexandrian eternal λόγος is also implied in Hb 4:12; 13:7.—S. also the ‘Comma Johanneum’ (to the bibliography in RGG3 I, ’54 [HGreeven] add AJülicher, GGA 1905, 930–35; AvHarnack, SBBerlAk 1915, 572f [=Studien I ’31, 151f]; MMeinertz, Einl. in d. NT4 ’33, 309–11; AGreiff, TQ 114, ’33, 465–80; CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46; WThiele, ZNW 50, ’59, 61–73) ὁ πατήρ, ὁ λόγος καὶ τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 1J 5:7 v.l. (s. N. app.; Borger, TRu 52, ’87, 57f). (Such interpolations were not unheard of. According to Diog. L. 1, 48 some people maintain that Solon inserted the verse mentioning the Athenians after Il. 2, 557.—τῆς τριάδος, τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ λόγου αὐτοῦ καὶ τῆς σοφίας αὐτοῦ Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 19].)—On the Logos: EZeller, D. Philosophie der Griechen III 24 1903, 417–34; MHeinze, D. Lehre v. Logos in d. griech. Philosophie 1872; PWendland, Philo u. d. kynisch-stoische Diatribe (Beiträge z. Gesch. der griech. Philosophie u. Religion by Wendl. and OKern 1895, 1–75); AAall, Gesch. d. Logosidee 1896, 1899; MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48f, I 482; 490 (index); LDürr, D. Wertung des göttl. Wortes im AT u. im ant. Orient ’38 (§9 of the Joh. Logos); EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1907, 83–111; (2 ’25); JLebreton, Les théories du Logos au début de l’ère chrétienne 1907; ESchwartz, NGG 1908, 537–56; GVos, The Range of the Logos-Title in the Prologue of the Fourth Gospel: PTR 11, 1913, 365–419; 557–602; RHarris, The Origin of the Prologue to St. John’s Gospel 1917, Athena, Sophia and the Logos: BJRL 7, 1, 1922 p. 56–72; M-JLagrange, Vers le Logos de S. Jean: RB 32, 1923, 161–84, Le Logos de Philon: ibid. 321–71; HLeisegang, Logos: Pauly-W. XIII 1926, 1035–81; TGlasson, Heraclitus’ Alleged Logos Doctr., JTS 3, ’52, 231–38.—NWeinstein, Z. Genesis d. Agada 1901, 29–90; Billerb. II 302–33.—Rtzst., Zwei religionsgeschichtl. Fragen 1901, 47–132, Mysterienrel.3 1927, 428 index; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 304ff; 316f; JKroll, D. Lehren d. Hermes Trismegistos1914, 418 index.—RBultmann, D. religionsgesch. Hintergrund des Prol. z. Joh.: HGunkel Festschr., 1923, II 1–26, Comm. ’41, 5ff; AAlexander, The Johannine Doctrine of the Logos: ET 36, 1925, 394–99; 467–72; (Rtzst. and) HSchaeder, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, 306–37; 350; GAvdBerghvanEysinga, In den beginne was de Logos: NThT 23, ’34, 105–23; JDillersberger, Das Wort von Logos ’35; RBury, The 4th Gosp. and the Logos-Doctrine ’40; EMay, CBQ 8, ’46, 438–47; GKnight, From Moses to Paul ’49, 120–29. TW IV 76–89; 126–40 (on this s. SLyonnet, Biblica 26, ’45, 126–31); CStange, ZST 21, ’50, 120–41; MBoismard, Le Prologue de St. Jean ’53; HLangkammer, BZ 9, ’65, 91–94; HRinggren, Word and Wisdom [hypostatization in Near East] ’47; WEltester, Haenchen Festschr., ’64, 109–34; HWeiss, Untersuchungen zur Kosmologie etc., TU 97, ’66, 216–82; MRissi, Die Logoslieder im Prolog des vierten Evangeliums, TZ 31, ’75, 321–36; HLausberg, NAWG, Ph. ’87, 1 pp. 1–7.—B. 1262. DELG s.v. λέγω B 1. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λόγος

  • 6 συνείρω

    συνείρω, [dialect] Aeol. [tense] aor. part. fem. συνέρραις ([etym.] α) dub. in Sapph.78:—
    A string together, Ar.Av. 1079;

    ᾠδαῖς τε καὶ ὀρχήσεσιν ἀλλήλοις Pl.Lg. 654a

    ; σ. [ὀνόματα] connect them with their roots, Id.Cra. 425b; σ. ἐπανελθόντες ἐπὶ τὴν ἀρχὴν μέχρι τῆς τελευτῆς τὸν λόγον trace its connexion, Id.Plt. 267a; σ. [τοὺς κύνας] ἀπό τινος lead them on connectedly from a point, X.Cyn.6.21;

    σ. στεφάνους Aristid.1.143J.

    ; ὄρπακας ἀνήτοιο (- τω codd.) Sapph. l.c.:—[voice] Pass., συνείρεται τὸ ἐφεξῆς is closely connected, follows of itself, Arist.GA 741b9, cf. GC 336b33; συνειρομένη πραγματεία a connected system, Id.Metaph. 986a7.
    II in speaking, freq. in a disparaging sense,

    σ. λόγους ἀπνευστεί D.18.308

    ;

    συνείρουσι μὲν τοὺς λόγους, ἴσασι δ' οὔπω Arist.EN 1147a21

    , cf.Phld.Rh.1.247 S.; ὑπὸ τὴν ἀναπνοὴν ἑπτὰ καὶ πέντε στίχους ς., in a breath, Plb.10. 47.9;

    σ. λήρους Luc.Tim.9

    , cf. Nigr.8, Bacch.7; also simply of a continuous speech,

    σ. καθ' ἓν ἕκαστον Isoc.15.184

    ;

    σ. τὰς ἑξῆς πράξεις D.S.16.76

    ;

    τὴν κατηγορίαν Luc.Pisc.22

    ;

    τὸ γνῶθι σαυτὸν πολλάκις Id.DMort.2.2

    .
    2 seemingly intr. (sc. λόγους), discourse,

    περὶ τῆς κλοπῆς Id.Prom.5

    ; connect one's reasoning, continue the subject, Arist.Top. 158a37, Metaph. 995a10, 1093b27;

    σ. εἰς τὸ πρόσω Id.Div. Somn.464b4

    ;

    ἀπὸ τῶν εἰρημένων Id.GA 716a4

    : and then, more generally, continue, c. part., συνεῖρον ἀπιόντες, i.e. they went off without pausing, X.Cyr.7.5.6; σ. κινούμενος continue moving, Arist.Ph. 262a16, cf. Diocl.Fr.142: abs., to be continuous or connected, Arist.SE 175a30, Mete. 362b29, GC 318a13, al., Epicur.Ep.3p.64U.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > συνείρω

  • 7 κοινός

    κοινός, ή, όν, also ός, όν S.Tr. 207 (lyr.):—
    A common (opp. ἴδιος), not in Hom. (v. ξυνός) ; ἐκ κοινοῦ shared in common, Hes.Op. 723;

    ἔσται γὰρ βίος ἐκ κ. Ar.Ec. 610

    ; of a common altar, Simon.140;

    τὸ τέμενος εἶναι κ. SIG1044.29

    (Halic., iv/iii B.C.);

    κ. ἔρχεται κῦμ' Ἀΐδα Pi.N.7.30

    ; τρεῖς.. κ. ὄμμ' ἐκτημέναι, of the Gorgons, A.Pr. 795; κ. ὠφέλημα θνητοῖσιν φανείς, of Prometheus, ib. 613;

    τὰς γυναῖκας εἶναι κοινάς Pl. R. 457d

    : prov.,

    κοινὸν τύχη A.Fr. 389

    , cf. Men.Mon. 356;

    κοινὰ τὰ τῶν φίλων E.Or. 735

    (troch.), Pl.Phdr. 279c, Men.9, etc.; κ. Ἑρμῆς 'share the luck', Id.Epit.67, 100; κ. ἀρωγά common aid (i.e. for all), S.Ph. 1145 (lyr.); ἐν δὲ κοινὸς ἀρσένων ἴτω κλαγγά and let the shouts of males rise jointly, Id.Tr. 207 (lyr.);

    κ. πόλεμον πολεμεῖν X.Hier.2.8

    ;

    τὸν ἀέρα τὸν κ. Men.531.8

    ;

    κ. τὸν ᾅδην ἔσχον οἱ πάντες βροτοί Id.538.8

    ;

    κ. ἀγαθὸν τοῦτ' ἐστί, χρηστὸς εὐτυχῶν Id.791

    : c. dat., κ. τινί common to or with another,

    ὑμῖν φῶς.. καὶ τοῖσδ' ἅπασι κ. A.Ag. 523

    ;

    ὁ δαίμων κ. ἦν ἀμφοῖν ἅμα Id.Th. 812

    ;

    θάλατταν κ. ἐᾶν τοῖς ἡττημένοις And.3.19

    ;

    οἰκία.. κοινοτάτη ἀεὶ τῷ δεομένῳ Id.1.147

    ; [πολιτεία] τίς κοινοτάτη; Arist.Pol. 1289b14, cf. 1265b29;

    κοινόν τι χαρᾷ καὶ λύπῃ δάκρυα X.HG7.1.32

    ;

    τὸν ἥλιον τὸν κ. ἡμῖν Men.611

    : c. gen.,

    πάντων αἰθὴρ κ. φάος εἱλίσσων A.Pr. 1092

    (anap.), cf. Pers. 132 (lyr.), Eu. 109, Pi.N.1.32; κ. τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων τε καὶ Ἀθηναίων shared in by both.., Pl.Mx. 241c, etc.: with Preps., τὸ ἐπὶ πᾶσι κ., v. infr. v;

    κ. κατ' ἀμφοτέρων A.D.Synt.144.19

    ;

    οὐ γίγνεταί μοί τι κ. πρός τινα AP11.141

    (Lucill.), cf. Iamb.Myst.5.7; μέρος κ. πρός τινα shared with.., CPR22.11 (ii A.D.), etc.;

    κ. μεταξύ τινων Stud.Pal.1.7

    ii 11
    (v A.D.).
    II in social and political relations, public, general, τὸ κ. ἀγαθόν the common weal, Th.5.90;

    κ. λόγῳ Id.5.37

    , Hdt.1.141; κ. στόλῳ ib. 170;

    ἀδικήματα D.21.45

    ;

    ὁ τῆς πόλεως κ. δήμιος Pl.Lg. 872b

    ; κοινότατον of public or general interest, ib. 724b, cf. Arist.Rh. 1354b29; of constitutions, popular, free,

    κοινοτέραν εἶναι τὴν ἐκείνου μοναρχίαν τῆς αὑτῶν δημοκρατίας Isoc.10.36

    .
    2 τὸ κ. the state,

    τὸ κ. Σπαρτιητέων Hdt.1.67

    : abs., of one's own state, Ar.Ec. 208, etc.;

    τὸ κ. ὠφελεῖται Antipho 3.2.3

    , cf. X.Cyr.2.2.20;

    τὰς ὠφελείας ἅπασιν εἰς τὸ κ. ἀπεδίδου Isoc.10.36

    .
    b esp. of leagues or federations,

    τὸ κ. τῶν Ἰώνων Hdt.5.109

    ;

    τῶν συμμάχων Isoc.14.21

    ;

    τῶν Βοιωτῶν SIG457.10

    (Thespiae, iii B.C.), Plb.20.6.1 (pl.), etc.; ἄνευ τοῦ πάντων κοινοῦ (sc. τῶν Θεσσαλῶν) Th.4.78; also, of private associations, Test.Epict.1.22, SIG 1113 ([place name] Loryma), al.; of guilds or corporations,

    τὸ κ. τῶν τεκτόνων POxy.53.2

    (iv A.D.); of boards of magistrates, τὸ κ. τῶν ἀρχόντων ib.54.12 (iii A.D.).
    c the government, public authorities, Th.1.90, 2.12, etc.;

    τὰ κ. Hdt.3.156

    ;

    ἀπαγγεῖλαι ἐπὶ τὰ κ. Th.5.37

    ; ἀπὸ τοῦ κ. by public authority, Hdt.5.85, 8.135; σὺν τῷ κ. by common consent, Id.9.87.
    d the public treasury,

    χρημάτων μεγάλων ἐν τῷ κ. γενομένων Id.7.144

    ;

    ἐν τῷ κ. καὶ ἐν τοῖς ίεροῖς Th.6.6

    , cf. 17;

    χρήματα δοῦναι ἐκ τοῦ κ. Hdt.9.87

    ; ἔχειν ἐν κοινῷ (without the Art.), Th.1.80, cf. Sch.adloc.
    e common right or rights of citizens,

    τὸ κ. τὸ τῶν πολιτῶν Arist.Pol. 1283b41

    .
    3 τὰ κ. public affairs: πρὸς τὰ κ. προσελθεῖν, προσιέναι, to enter public life, D. 18.257, Aeschin.1.165; but also, the public money, Ar.Pl. 569, D.8.23 (in full,

    τὰ κ. χρήματα X.HG6.5.34

    , Arist.Pol. 1271b11); τὰ κ. τῆς πόλεως, opp. τὰ ἁγνά, BMus.Inscr.4.481*.383; ἀπὸ κοινοῦ at the public expense, X.An.4.7.27, 5.1.12;

    ἐκ κοινοῦ φαγεῖν Euphro 8.4

    , cf. Antiph. 230; ἐκ κ. from common funds, at joint expense, PGrenf.1.21.19 (ii B.C.).
    III common, ordinary,

    τὰ κ. εἰδέναι Pl.Ax. 366b

    ;

    διὰ τῶν κ. ποιεῖσθαι τὰς πίστεις Arist.Rh. 1355a27

    ; κοινοτάτη τῶν αἰσθήσεων [ἡ ἁφή] Id.EN 1118b1; τὰ κ. commonplaces, Men.Sam.27, Epit. 309; so

    κ. τόπος Hermog.Prog.6

    , Aphth.Prog.7; ἡ κ. ἔννοια or ἐπίνοια, Plb. 2.62.2, 6.5.2; κ. νοῦς, φρένες, common sense, Phld.Rh.1.37 S., 202 S.; κ. καὶ διήκουσαι κακίαι general and all-pervading vices, Id.Sign.28;

    κ. καὶ δημώδη ὀνόματα Longin.40.2

    ;

    κ. καὶ ἐν μέσῳ κείμενα ὀνόματα D.H.Lys.3

    ; ἡ κ. διάλεκτος every-day language (free from archaisms and far-fetched expressions), Id.Isoc.2;

    πεφευγὼς τὸ κ. Phld.Acad. Ind.p.53

    M.
    2 Gramm., ordinary, 'regular' Greek, opp. special dialects, διάλεκτοί εἰσι πέντε, Ἀτθὶς Δωρὶς Αἰολὶς Ἰὰς καὶ κ. Sch.D.T. p.14 H., cf. D.S.1.16, Theodos.Can.p.37 H., etc.; ἡ κ. alone, A.D. Conj.223.24; τὸ κ. ἔθος, ἡ κ. ἐκφορά, Id.Adv.155.10, Pron.4.27; οἱ κ. the writers who use this language, Sch.D.T.p.469 H., EM405.23.
    b colloquial, vulgar Greek, Moer.pp.201 ([comp] Comp., prob. for καιν-), 243 P., al.
    c ἡ κ. διάλεκτος demotic Egyptian, Manethoap. J.Ap.1.14.
    3 common, of inferior quality,

    χρυσός POxy.905.5

    (ii A.D.), 1273.6 (iii A.D.).
    4 in magical formulae, of words added at will by the user, ' and so forth', freq.in Pap., PMag.Osl.1.255, PMag.Par.1.273, al.; κοινὰ ὅσα θέλεις ib.2.53;

    ὁ κ. λόγος PMag.Lond.46.435

    ; cf. κοινολογία.
    IV of Persons, connected by common origin or kindred, esp.of brothers and sisters,

    κ. σπέρμα Pi.O.7.92

    , cf.S.OT 261, OC 535 (lyr.);

    κ. αἷμα Id.Ant. 202

    , cf. 1; κ. πατήρ, μήτηρ, PAmh.2.152.9(v/vi A.D.), PFlor.47.11 (iii A.D.); also

    κ. Χάριτες Pi.O.2.50

    .
    2 one who shares in a thing, partner,

    ἐν θύμασιν κ. ποεῖσθαί τινα S.OT 240

    ;

    κ. ἐν κοινοῖσι λυπεῖσθαι Id.Aj. 267

    , cf. Ar.V. 917; also κ. τῷ θεῷ belonging in part to the god (who claims tithe of his substance), Berl.Sitzb.1927.161 ([place name] Cyrene).
    3 lending a ready ear to all, impartial,

    μὴ οὐ κ. ἀποβῆτε Th.3.53

    ; neutral, ib.68;

    κοινοὺς τῷ τε διώκοντι καὶ τῷ φεύγοντι Lys.15.1

    ;

    μέτριος καὶ κ. Arist.Ath.6.3

    ; κοινοί, οἱ, arbitrators, GDI1832.10 (Delph.);

    κ. μεσίτης PStrassb.41.14

    (iii A.D.); of a capital city, δεῖ.. κοινὴν εἶναι τῶν τόπων ἁπάντων easily accessible on all sides, Arist.Pol. 1327a6.
    b courteous, affable, X. Cyn.13.9;

    κ. ἅπασι γενέσθαι Isoc.5.80

    ;

    τῇ πρὸς πάντας φιλανθρωπίᾳ κ. Democh.2

    J.;

    ἔχειν τὰς κ. φρένας Phld.Rh.1.202

    S.
    c in bad sense, κοινή, , prostitute, Vett.Val.119.30, Porph.Hist.Phil.12 (pl.).
    d of events, κοινότεραι τύχαι more impartial, i.e. more equal, chances, Th.5.102; ἔστιν ἐν τῷ κ. πᾶσι c. inf., And.2.6.
    V in Logic, general, universal, τὸ κ. λαμβάνειν περί τινων, τὸ ἐπὶ πᾶσι κ., Pl.Tht. 185b, 185c;

    τὰ κ. λεγόμενα ἀξιώματα Arist.APo. 76b14

    ; αἱ κ. ἀρχαί ib. 88a36; κ. ἔννοιαι axioms, heading in Euc.; general,

    κ. ὅρος Arist.Metaph. 987b6

    ; κοινὰ καὶ στοιχειώδη general principles, Phld.Rh.1.69S.; κ. σημεῖον, opp. ἴδιον, Id.Sign.14; κ. κρίσις objectively valid judgement, Id.Po.5.22;

    ὄνομα κ. Str.10.2.10

    ; abstract,

    ὁ κ. ἄνθρωπος καὶ λογισμῷ ληπτός Dam.Pr. 341

    .
    VI Gramm.,
    1 κ. συλλαβή common syllable, capable of being long or short, D.T.633.17, Heph. 1.4.
    b κ. ποιήματα, poems which are both κατὰ στίχον and συστηματικά, e.g. the Sapphic stanza, Id.pp.58,59 C.; also, poems of ambiguous metrical form, Id.p.60 C.
    2 v.supr.111.2.
    3 of gender,

    κ. γένος D.T.634.19

    ; of nouns, A.D.Pron.30.7, al., EM143.33, 305.19, etc.
    4 ἀπὸ κοινοῦ λαμβάνειν, of two clauses taking a word in common, A.D.Synt.122.14, al.; κοινὸν or ἐκ κοινοῦ παραλαμβάνεσθαι, ib.20, 28, al.
    VII of forbidden meats, common, profane,

    φαγεῖν κ. καὶ ἀκάθαρτον Act.Ap.10.14

    , cf. Ep.Rom.14.14;

    κ. χερσὶ ἐσθίειν Ev.Marc.7.2

    .
    VIII κοινόν, τό, name of an eye-salve, CIL 13.10021.3, al.
    B Adv. κοινῶς in common, jointly, E. Ion 1462;

    τὰ κοινὰ κ. δεῖ φέρειν συμπτώματα Men.817

    : [comp] Comp., ἐν Κρήτῃ -οτέρως [ἔχει τὰ τῶν συσσιτίων] Arist.Pol. 1272a16.
    2 publicly,

    κ. μᾶλλον ὠφέλησαν ἢ ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων ἔβλαψαν Th.2.42

    , etc.
    3 sociably, like other citizens,

    οὐδὲ κ. οὐδὲ πολιτικῶς ἐβίωσαν Isoc.4.151

    ;

    ἴσως καὶ κ. πρός τινα προσφέρεσθαι Arist.Rh.Al. 1430a1

    ;

    κ. καὶ φιλικῶς Plu.Ant.33

    ; μετρίως καὶ κ. ὰσπάζεσθαι Id.Arat.43.
    4 in general, Diph.Siph. ap. Ath. 3.81a; ἡ κ. σύνεσις, τὸ κ. ἄνθρωπον", Phld.Vit.p.34J., Mort.38; opp. ἰδίως, Demetr.Lac.Herc.1014.41, Plu.Marc.8, cf. Longin.15.1;

    κοινότερον εἰπεῖν Phld.Rh.1.256

    S.; - οτέρως Orib.Fr.93.
    5 in the common dialect, A.D.Pron.82.27, al.: [comp] Comp. - ότερον Id.Synt.159.5.
    6 in plain language, opp. σοφιστικῶς, Plu.2.659f; in the ordinary or wide sense, opp. κυρίως, Them.in APo.5.5: [comp] Comp., M.Ant. 2.10.
    II fem. dat. [full] κοινῇ; [dialect] Dor. [full] κοινᾷ SIG56.11 (Argos, v B.C.); [dialect] Boeot. [full] κυνῆ ib.635.31 (Acraeph., ii B.C.):—in common, by common consent, Hdt.1.148, 3.79, S.OT 606, OC 1339, E.Hipp. 731, Th.1.3, etc.;

    κ. πᾶσι καὶ χωρίς Arist.Pol. 1278b23

    , cf. Ath.40.3; κ. μετά τινος, κ. σύν τινι, Pl.Smp. 209c, SIG346.27 (iv B.C.), X.Mem.1.6.14, etc.;

    ἰδίᾳ τε καὶ κ. Alex.291

    : also neut.pl.

    κοινά S.Ant. 546

    .
    2 publicly,

    καὶ κ. καὶ ἰδίᾳ X.HG1.2.10

    , Mem.2.1.12, etc.
    3 as Prep. c. dat., together with, E. Ion 1228, Hel. 829, Fr. 823.
    III with Preps., εἰς κοινόν in common, in public,

    ὑμῖν τῇδέ τ' ἐς κ. φράσω A.Pr. 844

    ;

    πᾶσιν ἐς κ. λέγω Id.Eu. 408

    , cf.Ar.Av. 457 (lyr.), Pl.Lg. 796e;

    εἰς κ. γνώμην ἀποφαίνεσθαι D.19.156

    ; εἰς τὸ κ. λέγειν, ἀγορεύειν, Pl.Tht. 165a, X. An.5.6.27; εἰς τὸ κ. for public use, Pl.Lg. 681c.
    2 ἀπὸ κοινοῦ, ἐκ κοινοῦ, v.A.1.1, 11.3, VI.4.
    3 ἀφεῖσαν ἐν κοινῷ ζητεῖν, Lat. rem in medio reliquerunt, Arist.Metaph. 987b14; but οἱ ἐν κ. γιγνόμενοι λόγοι, = οἱ ἐξωτερικοὶ λόγοι, Id.de An. 407b29.
    4 κατὰ κοινόν, opp. κατ' ἰδίαν, jointly, in common, Lexap.D.21.94, Plb.4.3.5; prob. for

    κατὰ κοινοῦ Id.11.30.3

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > κοινός

  • 8 συμμείγνυμι

    συμμείγνῡμι (freq. written [suff] σύμμεθ-μιγ- in codd.), Ar.Av. 701 ([voice] Pass.), E. Supp. 224, etc.; more rarely [suff] συμμεθ-ύω, X.Mem.3.14.5, [tense] impf. Id.Cyr.7.1.26, etc.; imper.
    A

    συμμείγνυ Pl.Phlb. 25d

    ; [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. [tense] pres. [full] συμμίσγω, as always in Hom., Thgn., Hdt., sts. in [dialect] Att. (Th.7.6, Pl.Lg. 678c, Phlb. 23d) and later Prose, SIG1025.8 (Cos, iv/iii B.C. ) (

    συμμείσγω PTeb.716.3

    (ii B.C.), 12.7 (ii B.C.)): [tense] fut. -μ<ε> ίξω X.Cyr.2.1.11, etc. (v. μείγνυμι): [tense] aor. συνέμειξα until iii B.C., PCair.Zen.545.13, 596.4 (other passages s.v. μείγνυμι), and sts. later, OGI751.3 (Attalus II, ii B.C.), 763.3 (Eumenes II, ii B.C.), BGU1784.2 (i B.C.), etc.; - μιξ- first in late iii B.C. (v. μείγνυμι) and freq. f.l. in codd., as of h.Ven.50, 251, Pi.O.3.9, etc.: [tense] pf.

    - μέμῐχα Plb.16.10.1

    , 38.13.5, Apollon.Perg.Con.Praef.:—[voice] Med., [tense] fut. -μ<ε> ίξομαι, in pass. sense, Thgn.1245, Bacis ap. Hdt.8.77:—mix together, commingle; the [voice] Act. first in h.Merc.81, h.Ven.50, 250, though the [voice] Pass. occurs in Il. (v. infr.); of two things, both in acc., συμμίσγων μυρίκας καὶ μυρσινοειδέας ὄζους h.Merc. l.c.; βοὰν αὐλῶν ἐπέων τε θέσιν συμμ<ε> ῖξαι Pi.O.3.9, etc.: c. acc. et dat. rei,

    τοῦτο.. γάλακτι συμμίσγοντες Hdt.4.23

    ; πῶς κεδνὰ τοῖς κακοῖσι συμμ<ε> ίξω; A.Ag. 648, cf. Pl.R. 415a, etc.; or c. acc. only, ὀργὴν συμμίσγων mixing in, adding, Thgn.214; συμμ<ε>ίξαντες τὰ στρατόπεδα having combined them, Hdt.4.114;

    ἐς τὠυτὸ ῥέεθρον τὸ ὕδωρ συμμίσγοντες Id.7.127

    :—rarely in [voice] Med., χρώματα συμμ<ε> ίξασθαι Poll.7.128:—[voice] Pass., with [tense] fut. [voice] Med. (v. supr.), to be commingled,

    ὅ γε Πηνειῷ συμμίσγεται Il.2.753

    ;

    συμμίσγεται τῷ Ἴστρῳ Hdt.4.48

    ;

    οὔποθ' ὕδωρ καὶ πῦρ συμμείξεται Thgn.1245

    ;

    σ. θαλίαισι νέκταρ Sapph.5

    ;

    οὐρανὸς σ. τῇ γῇ E.Cyc. 578

    ;

    ἀπὸ πλείστων Hp.

    Aër. 8; τινι or πρὸς ἄλληλα, Pl.Ti. 83c, 57d; join forces, of two armies, Th.2.31; to be formed by combination, opp. διακρίνομαι, Anaxag. 17; ἐξ ἀμφοῖν συμμ<ε> ιχθείς Pl.Phlb. 22a, cf. 23d: metaph., εἶναι οὐδένα τῷ κακὸν οὐ συνεμ<ε> ίχθη there is none who has not misery as an ingredient in his fate, Hdt.7.203; cf.

    συγκεράννυμι; συμμεμ<ε>ιγμένος Ἑλληνικὸς καὶ βαρβαρικὸς παιών Lys.2.38

    ; συμμιγέντων τούτων πάντων when all these things happened together, Hdt.8.38.
    2 unite sexually, couple,

    θεοὺς γυναιξί h.Ven.50

    , cf. 250; λέχος τινὶ ς. Ar.Th. 891, cf. E.Supp. 222, 224:—[voice] Pass.,

    συμμ<ε>ιχθῆναι γυναικί Hdt.4.114

    ;

    πάλιν ξυμμι<ς>γέσθω Hp.Superf.26

    ;

    συμμιγῆναι ἀλλήλοις Pl.Smp. 207b

    ;

    ὅταν.. συμμ<ς>ιχθῆτον εἰς ταὐτὸν δύο E.Fr.898.11

    ; Ἔρως ξυνέμ<ε> ιξεν

    ξυμμ<ε>ιγνυμένων δ' ἑτέρων ἑτέροις γένετ' οὐρανός Ar.Av. 700

    .
    3 [voice] Med. and [voice] Pass., associate with persons, Hdt.6.138; ἀνοσίοισι συμμιγεὶς.. ἀνδράσιν mixed up, connected with ungodly men, A.Th. 611.
    4 metaph., τινὰ εὐθαλεῖ τύχᾳ introduce him to, make him acquainted with high fortune, Pi.P.9.72; χρῆμα δὲ συμμ<ε>ίξῃς μηδενί communicate it not to any one, Thgn.64; κοινόν τι πρῆγμα συμμ<ε>ῖξαί τινι communicate to one a subject of common interest, Hdt.8.58; σ. συμβόλαια form mutual contracts, Pl.Lg. 958c.
    II intr. in [voice] Act., in sense like the [voice] Pass., have dealings or intercourse with, associate or communicate with, κακοῖσι, ἀγαθοῖς, Thgn.36, 1165, cf. Hdt.4.151, etc.;

    πονηροῖς ἀνθρώποις D.32.11

    ;

    Διονυσίῳ Phld.Acad.Ind. p.7

    M.; σ. πρός τινα join him, X.HG1.3.7: generally, meet for conversation or traffic, Hdt.2.63, 6.23, etc.; σ. τινί talk or converse with, Id.1.123, E.Hel. 324, Ar.Ec. 516 (anap.), X.Cyr.8.1.46;

    διὰ λόγων σ. τινί Pl.Plt. 258a

    ;

    πρός τινα X.Cyr.7.4.11

    ; Ἱέραξ ὁ παρὰ σοῦ συμμείξας BGUl.c.; of ambassadors interviewing kings, OGI ll. cc.
    2 of sexual intercourse, Pl.Lg. 930d.
    3 in hostile sense, meet in close fight, come to blows, engage, τινι with one, Hdt.1.127, 6.14, Th.7.6, etc.: abs., Id.1.49, 8.104, X. An.4.6.24; also

    σ. τῇ ναυμαχίῃ Hdt.1.166

    ;

    σ. τινὶ ἐς μάχην Id.4.127

    , etc.;

    σ. ὁμόσε τισί X.Cyr.7.1.26

    ; σ. εἰς χεῖράς τινι ib.2.1.11; of ships, Th.2.84: c. acc., νείκεα συνμείσχιν ([etym.] συμμείξειν)

    πόλεμόν θ' ἅμα IG12.920

    .
    4 generally, meet,

    τοῖς ἄλλοις εἰς λιμένα X.An. 6.3.24

    , cf. PEleph.29.11 (iii B.C.), etc.; θάλατται πρὸς ἀλλήλας ς. Arist.Mete. 354a1;

    ποταμοὶ σ. ἀλλήλοις D.S.2.37

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > συμμείγνυμι

  • 9 ζάω

    ζάω contr. ζῶ (Hom.+) impf. ἔζων (Ro 7:9 B ἔζην; on this form s. Schwyzer I 675; B-D-F §88; Mlt-H. 194, both w. ref.); fut. ζήσω (uniformly attested Ro 6:2; Hb 12:9); the later (since Hippocr. VII p. 536 L.; LXX; AscIs 3:9; Jos., Ant. 1, 193 al.) form ζήσομαι (B-D-F §77; Rob. 356) is more common (on the fut. forms s. JLee, NovT 22, ’80, 289–98; GKilpatrick, ibid. 25, ’83, 146–51); 1 aor. ἔζησα. On the LXX usage s. Thackeray 269; for forms in pap, Gignac II 370.
    to be alive physically, live
    of physical life in contrast to death
    α. gener. Ac 22:22; Ro 7:1, 2, 3; 14:8ac; 1 Cor 7:39; 2 Cor 5:15a; 6:9; Hb 9:17. ψυχὴ ζῶσα a living soul (Gen 1:20 al.; Just., D. 6, 1 ζῇ ψυχῇ) 1 Cor 15:45 (Gen 2:7); Rv 16:3 v.l. ὅσα ἔτη ζῇ as many years as he lives B 10:6 (cp. SIG 663, 6; Sb 173, 6 Αὐρήλιος ζήσας ἔτη νε´; En 10:10). τὸ ζῆν life (Attic wr., ins, pap, LXX) ὥστε ἐξαπορηθῆναι ἡμᾶς καὶ τοῦ ζῆν so that we even despaired of life 2 Cor 1:8. διὰ παντὸς τοῦ ζῆν during the whole lifetime Hb 2:15 (cp. Diod S 1, 74, 3 διατελεῖν πάντα τὸν τοῦ ζῆν χρόνον; 4, 46, 4). ἔτι ζῶν while he was still living= before his death Mt 27:63 (CB I/2 660 no. 618 Ζώσιμος ἔτι ζῶν κατεσκεύασεν; 3 Km 12:6). ζῶντες ἐβλήθησαν … εἰς τὴν λίμνην τοῦ πυρός they were thrown alive into the lake of fire Rv 19:20. ζῶσα τέθνηκεν though alive she is dead 1 Ti 5:6 (cp. Sextus 7). ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες we during our (earthly) life 2 Cor 4:11; the same phrase= we who are still living 1 Th 4:15, 17. Here the opp. is νεκροί, as in Mt 22:32; Mk 12:27; Lk 20:38a. ζῶντες καὶ νεκροί the living and the dead Ac 10:42; Ro 14:9b; 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; 2 Cl 1:1; B 7:2.—Occasionally the contrast betw. νεκρός and ζῆν is used fig. with ref. to the realm of religion and ethics Lk 15:24 v.l., 32.
    β. of dead persons who return to life become alive again: of humans in general (3 Km 17:23) Mt 9:18; Ac 9:41; 20:12; Rv 20:4, 5; AcPl Ha 11, 7. Of Jesus Mk 16:11; Lk 24:5, 23; Ac 1:3; 25:19; Ro 14:9a; 2 Cor 13:4a; Rv 1:18b; 2:8 (Just., D. 69, 6 νεκροὺς … ζῆν ποιήσας).
    γ. of sick persons, if their illness terminates not in death but in recovery be well, recover (Artem. 4, 4 ἔζησεν ὁ παῖς=became well; 5, 71; 72; PGM 1, 188; 4 Km 1:2; 8:8 εἰ ζήσομαι ἐκ τῆς ἀρρωστίας μου ταύτης; Jos., Vi. 421) Mk 5:23; J 4:50, 51, 53.—Of removal of anxiety 1 Th 3:8.
    δ. also of healthy persons live on, remain alive (X., An. 3, 2, 39 ὅστις δὲ ζῆν ἐπιθυμεῖ πειράσθω νικᾶν; Ep. 56 of Apollonius of Tyana [Philostrat. I 359, 14]; ApcMos 31 διὰ τί σὺ ἀποθνῄσκεις καγὼ ζῶ;) Ac 25:24; 28:4. ἐὰν ὁ κύριος θελήσῃ ζήσομεν Js 4:15. ὸ̓ς ἔχει τὴν πληγὴν τῆς μαχαίρης καὶ ἔζησεν Rv 13:14.
    ε. of beings that in reality, or as they are portrayed, are not subject to death: of Melchizedek Hb 7:8 (opp. ἀποθνῄσκοντες ἄνθρωποι). Jesus as everlasting high priest πάντοτε ζῶν 7:25.—In this sense it is most comprehensively applied to God (s. CBurchard, Untersuch. zu JosAs p. 103) (ὁ) θεὸς (ὁ) ζῶν (cp. 4 Km 19:4, 16; Is 37:4, 17; Hos 2:1; Da 6:21 Theod.; 3 Macc 6:28; TestAbr A 17 p. 99, 10 [Stone p. 46]; TestJob 37:2; JosAs 49:3 al.; SibOr 3, 763; POxy 924, 11 [IV A.D., Gnostic]; PGM 4, 1038 ὁ μέγας ζῶν θεός; 7, 823; 12, 79; Philo, Decal. 67 ὁ ζῶν ἀεὶ θεός; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 59, 18.—The phrase ‘the living God’ is not found in Joseph.) Mt 16:16; 26:63; J 6:69 v.l.; Ac 14:15; Ro 9:26 (Hos 2:1); 2 Cor 3:3; 6:16; 1 Th 1:9; 1 Ti 3:15; 4:10; 6:17 v.l.; Hb 3:12; 9:14; 10:31; 12:22; Rv 1:18a; 4:10; 7:2; 10:6; 2 Cl 20:2; GJs 20:1; AcPl Ha 2, 32; also ὁ ζῶν πατήρ J 6:57. W. the addition εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων Rv 15:7; cp. 4:9 (cp. Tob 13:2; Sir 18:1). God takes a sovereign oath in the words ζῶ ἐγώ as surely as I live (Num 14:28 al.) Ro 14:11 (Is 49:18; classical parallels GStählin, NovT 5, ’62, 142 n. 2). ζῇ κύριος ὁ θεός [μου] as surely as the Lord my God lives GJs 4:1; 6:1; 13:3; 15:3; 19:3 (Judg 8:19; 1 Km 25:34 al; GrBar 1:7; cp. ApcEsdr 2:7); in expanded form καὶ ζῇ ὁ Χριστὸς αὐτοῦ 15:4 (s. deStrycker ad loc.).—Christ lives διὰ τὸν πατέρα because of the Father J 6:57b (s. Bultmann, comm. ad loc.).
    w. mention of that upon which life depends ἐπί τινι on the basis of someth. (Andoc. 1, 100; Isocr. 10, 18; Ael. Aristid. 28, 103 K.=49 p. 525 D.) ζ. ἐπʼ ἄρτῳ live on bread Mt 4:4; Lk 4:4 (both Dt 8:3). ζ. ἔκ τινος obtain one’s living fr. someth. (Aristoph., Eccl. 591; Demosth. 57, 36; POxy 1117, 19; 1557, 12; TestJob 47:1f) 1 Cor 9:14.
    w. more precise mention of the sphere (Artem. 3, 62 ἐν ἀγορᾷ ζ.=spend his life in the marketplace) ζ. ἐν σαρκί live in the flesh in contrast to the heavenly life Phil 1:22; Gal 2:20c; ζ. ἐν κόσμῳ live in the world Col 2:20. ζ. ἐν θεῷ, live in God (as the Being who penetrates and embraces everything) Ac 17:28 (s. κινέω 3). For AcPl Ha 1, 15 s. 2a end.
    to live in a transcendent sense, live, of the sanctified life of a child of God (ζῆν in the sense of a higher type of life than the animal: X., Mem. 3, 3, 11; Cass. Dio 69, 19: after years of public service, Similis retires and prepares this epitaph: Σίμιλις ἐνταύθα κεῖται βιοὺς μὲν ἔτη τόσα, ζήσας δὲ ἔτη ἑπτά=Here lies Similis, existing for so many years, but alive for only seven.).
    in the world ἐγὼ ἔζων χωρὶς νόμου ποτέ I was once (truly) alive without law (this has been interpr. to mean when no law existed; Paul is then regarded as speaking fr. the viewpoint of humanity in paradise before the command Gen 2:16 f; 3:3. Another interpr. thinks of Paul as referring to the period in his life when he was not conscious of the existence and significance of the law. In view of Paul’s climactic affirmation in Ro 7:25, Paul probably illustrates in the first person the perils of a Christian who succumbs to the illusion that moral action is connected with law rather than with the ‘spirit of life in Christ’ Ro 8:2) Ro 7:9. Even now those who listen to the voice of the Son of God enjoy this life J 5:25; cp. 11:26; likew. those who receive him into their being ὁ τρώγων τὸν ἄρτον 6:57c; cp. Ro 6:11, 13 (ἐκ νεκρῶν ζῶντας); Gal 2:19; Rv 3:1. This heavenly life on earth is a ζ. πνεύματι Gal 5:25 or a life not of mere human achievement, but of Christ who lives in Christians 2:20ab. Also of the superhuman power of the apostle ζήσομεν σὺν αὐτῷ ἐκ δυνάμεως θεοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς we shall live with him (Christ) through God’s power in our dealings with you 2 Cor 13:4. ὁ κύριος βούλεται ζῆν ἡμᾶς ἐν θεῷ=the Lord wills that we live under God’s direction AcPl Ha 1, 15 (opp. ἀποθανεῖν ἐν ἁμαρτίαις; s. 1c end)
    in the glory of the life to come (Sir 48:11; cp. Dt 4:1; 8:1; 30:16).
    α. abs. Lk 10:28; J 11:25; 14:19; Ro 8:13b; Hb 12:9. ἐμοὶ τ. ζῆν Χριστός= life is possible for me only where Christ is (hence death is gain) Phil 1:21 (s. OSchmitz, GHeinrici Festschr. 1914, 155–69). Another common interpr. is for me to live is Christ, i.e. while I am alive I experience real life in connection with Christ; w. death comes life in all fullness in the presence of Jesus.
    β. More specifically εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα have eternal life (Ps.-Lucian, Philopatr. 17 ζῆν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα; PsSol 14:2) J 6:51, 58 (in J the blessed life which the follower of Jesus enjoys here and now in the body is simply continued in the heavenly life of the future. In other respects also the dividing line betw. the present and the future life is somet. nonexistent or at least not discernible); B 6:3; 8:5; 9:2; 11:10f; ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ (i.e. Χριστῷ) ζ. live together with Christ 1 Th 5:10; ζ. διʼ αὐτοῦ (i.e. Chr.) 1J 4:9; ζ. κατὰ θεὸν πνεύματι live, as God (lives), in the Spirit 1 Pt 4:6. ὁ δίκαιος ἐκ πίστεως ζήσεται (cp. Hab 2:4) he that is just through faith will have life Ro 1:17 (AFeuillet, NTS 6, ’59, 52–80; but s. Fitzmyer, Ro [AB] ad loc.); Gal 3:11; Hb 10:38. This life is τὸ ἀληθινὸν ζῆν ITr 9:2; IEph 11:1. Christ is called τὸ ἀδιάκριτον ἡμῶν ζῆν our unshakable or inseparable life 3:2. τὸ διὰ παντὸς ἡμῶν ζῆν our total life 1 Mg 1:2—The law-directed pers. believes concerning legal performance: ὁ ποιήσας αὐτὰ ζήσεται ἐν αὐτοῖς (Lev 18:5) Gal 3:12; cp. Ro 10:5 (cp. Dio Chrys. 58 [75], 1 οἱ τοῦτον [= τ. νόμον] φυλάττοντες ἔχονται τῆς σωτηρίας=those who observe law have a firm grip on security).
    to conduct oneself in a pattern of behavior, live (Hom. et al.)
    used w. adverbs or other modifiers: adv. (Sallust. 19 p. 34, 25 κακῶς ζῆν [Just., A I, 4, 7]; SIG 889, 13ff; Wsd 14:28; Philo; Jos., Ant. 12, 198; Ath. 3, 1 δίκην θηρίων) ἀσώτως Lk 15:13. ἐθνικῶς and ἰουδαϊκῶς Gal 2:14. εὐσεβῶς 2 Ti 3:12. πανούργως Hm 3, 3. σωφρόνως κ. δικαίως κ. εὐσεβῶς Tit 2:12 (Plut., Mor. 1108c ζῆν σωφρόνως κ. δικαίως; cp. Diog. L. 10, 132; 140; Ar. 15, 10).—Φαρισαῖος live as a Pharisee Ac 26:5. ἐν πίστει Gal 2:20d. ἐν ἁμαρτίᾳ Ro 6:2; ζ. ἐν τούτοις live in these (sins) Col 3:7. κατὰ ἀλήθειαν in keeping w. the truth IEph 6:2 (cp. Philo, Post. Cai. 73 κατὰ βούλημα τὸ τοῦ θεοῦ ζ.; Jos., Ant. 4, 302 κατὰ τ. νόμους ζ.; Just., D. 47, 4 κατὰ τὸν νόμον; Orig., C. Cels. 7, 12, 7 κατὰ τὰς θείας γραφάς). κατὰ θεόν 8:1 (cp. SIG 910 A and B). κατὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν IPhld 3:2. κατὰ Χριστιανισμόν live in accordance w. (our) commitment to Christ IMg 10:1. κατὰ σάρκα Ro 8:12f; Dg 5:8; κατὰ κυριακὴν ζ. (opp. σαββατίζειν) include the observance of the Lord’s day in one’s life IMg 9:1. Of a married woman ζ. μετὰ ἀνδρός live w. her husband Lk 2:36 (for the added acc. of extent of time cp. Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 332 D.; Pr 28:16; ἥτις ἔζησεν καλῶς μετʼ ἐμοῦ ἔτη 28, μῆνας 4, ἡμέρας 5: SEG II, 384, 6–8 [restored]; s. also FDanker, Jesus and the New Age ’88, 71).
    τινί live for someone or someth., for the other’s benefit (Hom. et al.; Demosth. 7, 17 οἳ οὐκ αἰσχύνονται Φιλίππῳ ζῶντες καὶ οὐ τῇ ἑαυτῶν πατρίδι; Dionys. Hal. 3, 17 … παῖδες, τῷ πατρὶ ζῶντες) ζ. τῷ θεῷ (4 Macc 7:19; 16:25; Philo, Mut. Nom. 13, Rer. Div. Her. 111; s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 10) Lk 20:38b (cp. Soph., Ajax 970); Ro 6:10, 11; Gal 2:19; Hm 3:5; AcPl Ha 10, 7; τῷ κυρίῳ Ro 14:8b (cp. Plut., Cleom. 819 [31, 5]). For Christ 2 Cor 5:15; τῷ ἐμῷ βασιλεῖ AcPl Ha 9, 26 (restored after Aa I 112, 14) τῇ δικαιοσύνῃ ζ. 1 Pt 2:24; ἑαυτῷ ζ. live for oneself (Menand., Fgm. 646 Kö. οὐχ ἑαυτῷ ζῆν μόνον; Diod S 10, 33, 2 ζ. ἑαυτοῖς=live for themselves) Ro 14:7.
    to be full of vitality, be lively the ptc. is used fig. w. respect to things (cp. τῶν δένδρων τῶν ζῶντων ParJer 9:3), of spring water in contrast w. cistern water ὕδωρ ζῶν (Gen 26:19; Lev 14:5; Jer 2:13 v.l.; Zech 14:8.—Stagnant water is called ὕ. νεκρόν: Synes., Ep. 114, 254d) J 4:10f (Hdb. exc. on J 4:14); 7:38; D 7:1f (Wengst p. 77 n. 57). ζώσας πηγάς Rv 7:17 v.l.
    to be life-productive, offer life ptc. used w. respect to things (SIG 1173 [138 A.D.], 5 ζῶσαι ἀρεταὶ ἐγένοντο=miracles full of divine life occurred) λόγια ζῶντα words that meant life Ac 7:38. λόγος ζῶν θεοῦ 1 Pt 1:23; cp. Hb 4:12. ὁδὸς ζῶσα a living way 10:20. ἐλπὶς ζῶσα a living hope 1 Pt 1:3.—ζ. is also used of things which serve as descriptions of pers. who communicate divine life: of Christ ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν J 6:51a. λίθος ζῶν 1 Pt 2:4. Of Christians: θυσία ζῶσα a living sacrifice Ro 12:1. λίθοι ζῶντες 1 Pt 2:5.—τὰ παρὰ ζώσης φωνῆς καὶ μενούσης the (words) of a living and abiding voice Papias (2:4) (opp. ἐκ τῶν βιβλίων).—Lit. s. ζωή end. DELG s.v. ζώω.M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ζάω

  • 10 κάθημαι

    κάθημαι (Hom.+; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr.; Jos., Ant. 5, 192; Ath. 17:3 [ptc. as name of an image of Athene]) 2 sg. κάθῃ (since Hyperid., Fgm. 115 [OLautensach, Glotta 8, 1917, 186]; POxy 33 verso III, 13 [II A.D.]; TestJob 24:3) Ac 23:3; pl. κάθησθε Lk 22:30 v.l., impv. κάθου (Moeris 215: κάθησο Ἀττικῶς, κάθου κοινῶς; later Attic [Lautensach, Glotta 9, 1918, 88; s. also AMaidhof, Z. Begriffsbestimmung der Koine 1912, 300]) twice in Js 2:3 and seven times in a quot. fr. Ps 109:1 (B-D-F §100; Mlt-H. 206f; s. 3 below); impf. ἐκαθήμην (on the augment s. B-D-F §69, 1; Mlt-H. 192); fut. καθήσομαι (oft. LXX) Mt 19:28; Lk 22:30.
    to be in a seated position, sit
    w. the place indicated by a prep. ἀπέναντί τινος opposite someth. Mt 27:61.—εἴς τι on someth. (Pel.-Leg. p. 4, 4 καθημένη εἰς βαδιστήν=‘sitting on a donkey’; cp. also Musonius 43, 18 H. καθῆσθαι εἰς Σινώπην) εἰς τὸ ὄρος τ. ἐλαιῶν Mk 13:3; cp. Hs 5, 1, 1.—ἐκ δεξιῶν τινος at someone’s right (hand) Mt 26:64; Mk 14:62; Lk 22:69.—ἐν: Mt 11:16; 26:69; Lk 7:32. ἐν σάκκῳ κ. σποδῷ 10:13. ἐν δεξιᾷ τινος at someone’s right Col 3:1. ἐν τοῖς δεξιοῖς on the right (side) Mk 16:5.—ἐπάνω τινός on or upon someth. Mt 23:22; Rv 6:8.—ἐπί τινος on someth. (Babrius 57, 14; UPZ 79, 10 [160 B.C.]) Mt 24:3. ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου (Aeschines in Ps.-Demetr. 205; Cebes 21, 3 ἐπὶ θρόνου ὑψηλοῦ; Ex 11:5 al.; TestAbr A 12 p. 91, 9 [Stone p. 30]; B 8 p. 112, 21 [Stone p. 72]; Jos., Ant. 5, 192); Rv 4:2 v.l.; 4:9f; 5:1, 7, 13 v.l.; 6:16; 7:10 v.l., 15; 19:4 v.l.; 20:11 v.l.; 21:5 v.l. ἐπὶ θρόνων Lk 22:30. ἐπὶ τῆς νεφέλης (Is 19:1) 14:15f. ἐπὶ τοῦ ἅρματος Ac 8:28. ἐπὶ τ. ἵππων Rv 9:17; 19:18. ἐπὶ τοῦ ἵππου vs. 19, 21 (cp. TestJud 3:2). Of judges (κ.=‘sit in judgment’: Pla., Ap. 35c; Hyperid. 3, 6) ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Mt 27:19.—ἐπὶ τῇ ὡραίᾳ πύλῃ at the ‘Beautiful Gate’ Ac 3:10. ἐπὶ τῷ θρόνῳ Rv 5:13; 6:16 v.l.; 7:10, 15 v.l.; 19:4; 21:5.—ἐπί τι w. acc. of place (Lev 8:35) ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον Mt 9:9; Mk 2:14; Lk 5:27; ἐπὶ πῶλον ὄνου J 12:15; ἐπʼ αὐτόν (horse) Rv 6:2, 4f; 19:11, 18 v.l.; ἐπὶ θηρίον 17:3; ἐπὶ (τὸν) θρόνον, (τοὺς) θρόνους (3 Km 1:27; Jer 13:13 A; 43, 30 A; TestJob 20:4) Mt 19:28; Rv 4:2, 4; 11:16; 20:11; ἐπὶ τὴν νεφέλην 14:14, 16 v.l.—παρά τι beside someth. παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν at the side of the road Mt 20:30; Mk 10:46; Lk 18:35.—περί τινα around someone Mk 3:32, 34.—πρὸς τὸ φῶς by the fire Lk 22:56 (Aristoph., Vesp. 773 πρὸς τὸ πῦρ κ. Likewise Menand., Fgm. 806 Kö.).
    w. the place indicated by an adv. of place: ἐκεῖ Mk 2:6; οὗ Ac 2:2; Rv 17:15; ὅπου vs. 9.
    abs. sit, sit there (Epict. 2, 16, 13 εὔχου καθήμενος; 33) Mt 27:36; Lk 5:17; J 2:14; 9:8; Ac 14:8; 1 Cor 14:30; B 10:4.
    w. some indication of the state or characteristics of the pers. sitting (Ex 18:14 σὺ κάθησαι μόνος; κ. of a judge Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 318 D.; 327) σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με; do you sit there to judge me? Ac 23:3 (Ἄβελ … κάθηται ὧδε κρῖναι TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 7 [Stone p. 32]).
    in the special sense sit quietly Mk 5:15; Lk 8:35. Be enthroned in majesty (Od. 16, 264) κάθημαι βασίλισσα Rv 18:7.
    to be a resident in a place, stay, be, live, reside, settle, fig. ext of 1 (Hom. et al.; Hdt. 5, 63 ἐν Δελφοῖς; Musonius p. 59, 7 ἐν πόλει; Ael. Aristid. 50, 14 K.=26 p. 505 D.; Is 9:8 v.l.; 2 Esdr 21:6; Jdth 4:8; 5:3) Lk 21:35; Rv 14:6 (cp. Jer 32:29); 17:1, 9 (s. 1b). πρός τινα w. someone D 12:3; 13:1. ἐν σκότει (σκοτίᾳ v.l.) … καὶ ἐν σκιᾷ θανάτου Mt 4:16. ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ θανάτου (Ps 106:10) Lk 1:79 (cp. Pind., O. 1, 83 ἐν σκότῳ καθήμενος [=one who enters old age without accomplishments worthy of remembrance]; Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 272 D.: ἐν τ. στενοῖς τ. ἐλπίδων ἐκάθηντο). (The restoration [καθήμ]ε̣ν̣ο̣ι̣ AcPl Ha 8, 33 is questionable, s. the rdg. of BMM, s.v. πεδάω.)
    to take a seated position, sit down; the occurrence of this sense in our lit. can scarcely be disputed; the same is true of the LXX (W-S. §14, 3). It is to be assumed for the impv. in all its occurrences; seven of them are connected w. Ps 109:1: κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου Mt 22:44; Mk 12:36; Lk 20:42; Ac 2:34; Hb 1:13; 1 Cl 36:5; B 12:10. The impv. has the same mng. twice in Js 2:3. But this sense is also quite probable for the foll. pass.: ἐν τῇ θαλάσσῃ Mk 4:1. ἐπάνω τινός Mt 28:2. μετά τινος 26:58; J 6:3 (καθίζω v.l.). παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν Mt 13:1.—ἐκεῖ Mt 15:29.—μέσος αὐτῶν Lk 22:55.—Abs. Mt 13:2.—B. 455. DELG s.v. ἧμαι. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κάθημαι

  • 11 πίπτω

    πίπτω (Hom.+) impf. ἔπιπτον; fut. πεσοῦμαι (B-D-F §77; Rob. 356); 2 aor. ἔπεσον and ἔπεσα (B-D-F §81, 3; W-S. §13, 13; Mlt-H. 208; W-H., app. p. 164; Tdf., Prol. p. 123); pf. 2 sg. πέπτωκας Rv 2:5 (πέπτωκες v.l.; B-D-F §83, 2; W-S. §13, 16; Mlt-H 221), 3 pl. πέπτωκαν Rv 18:3 v.l. (W-S. §13, 15; Mlt-H. 221)
    to move w. relative rapidity in a downward direction, fall, the passive of the idea conveyed in βάλλω.
    fall (down) from a higher point, w. the ‘point from which’ designated by ἀπό (Hom. et al.) ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης from the table Mt 15:27; Lk 16:21. ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ Mt 24:29. ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς Ac 27:34 v.l. (of the falling out of hair, as Synes., Calvit. 1, p. 63b). The direction or destination of the fall is expressed by an adv. ἀπὸ τοῦ τριστέγου κάτω down from the third story Ac 20:9. ἀπὸ τοῦ κεράμου χαμαί from the roof to the ground Hm 11:20. ἔκ τινος from someth.: ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (Sallust. 4 p. 8, 19; Job 1:16; 3 Km 18:38.—SibOr 5, 72 ἐξ ἄστρων) Mk 13:25; of lightning (Ps.-Plut., Vi. Hom. 111 εἰ ἐκπίπτοι ἡ ἀστράπη; Ps.-Clem., Hom. 9, 5; 6) Lk 10:18 (Lycophron, vs. 363 of the image of Athena ἐξ οὐρανοῦ πεσοῦσα. Cp. σατάν; be thrown is also possible here); Rv 8:10a; the destination is added ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ εἰς τὴν γῆν 9:1 (Ps.-Callisth. 2, 10, 10 ἐξ οὐρανοῦ εἰς τὸ ἔδαφος πεπτωκότες). W. only the destination given ἐν μέσῳ τῶν ἀκανθῶν among the thorns Lk 8:7. ἐπί τι on someth. Rv 8:10b. ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν (Aeschyl., Ag. 1019; Am 3:5; JosAs 16:16) Mt 10:29 (with the patristic v.l. εἰς παγίδα cp. Am 3:5 and Aesop, Fab. 193 P.=340 H./284 Ch./207 H-H. of a bird: ἐμπίπτειν εἰς τοὺς βρόχους); 13:8; Hm 11:21 (here the ‘place from which’ is designated by an adv.: ἄνωθεν).—ἐπὶ τὰ πετρώδη Mt 13:5; cp. Mk 4:5 (ἐπί 4bγ). ἐπὶ τὰς ἀκάνθας Mt 13:7 (ἐπί 4bδ). A pers. falls down ἐπὶ τὸν λίθον on the stone Mt 21:44a; Lk 20:18a. Conversely the stone falls on a pers. Mt 21:44b; Lk 20:18b. Likew. ἐπί τινα 23:30; Rv 6:16 (cp. on both Hos 10:8).—In imagery ὁ ἥλιος π. ἐπί τινα the (heat of the) sun falls upon someone Rv 7:16 (Maximus Tyr. 4, 1a ἡλίου φῶς πίπτον εἰς γῆν; Alex. Aphr., An. Mant. p. 146, 9 Br. τὸ φῶς ἐπὶ πάντα πίπτει). ὁ κλῆρος π. ἐπί τινα (κλῆρος 1) Ac 1:26. come (upon) ἐπί τινα someone ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος Ac 13:11. Rv 11:11 v.l. (φόβος 2a).—εἴς τι (Hes., Op. 620) εἰς τὴν γῆν (Phlegon: 257 Fgm. 36, 1, 5 Jac. πίπτειν εἰς τὴν γῆν) Mk 4:8; Lk 8:8; J 12:24; Rv 6:13; 1 Cl 24:5. εἰς τὴν ὁδόν Hv 3, 7, 1. εἰς βόθυνον Mt 15:14; cp. Lk 14:5. εἰς τὰς ἀκάνθας Mk 4:7; Lk 8:14. εἰς τὸ πῦρ Hv 3, 7, 2. παρά τι on someth. παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν (Iambl. Erot. p. 222, 22) Mt 13:4; Mk 4:4; Lk 8:5. ἐγγύς τινος near someth. ἐγγὺς (τῶν) ὑδάτων Hv 3, 2, 9; 3, 7, 3.
    of someth. that, until recently, has been standing (upright) fall (down), fall to pieces
    α. of persons
    א. fall to the ground, fall down (violently) εἰς τὸ πῦρ καὶ εἰς τὸ ὕδωρ Mt 17:15 (but HZimmern, Die Keilinschriften u. d. AT3 1903, 366; 363f, and JWeiss ad loc. take the falling into fire and water to mean fever and chills). ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς (SibOr 4, 110; 5, 100) Mk 9:20 (π. under the infl. of a hostile spirit; sim. Jos., Ant. 8, 47). ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν (SibOr 4, 110 v.l.) Ac 9:4; cp. 22:7 (s. ἔδαφος). χαμαί (Job 1:20; Philo, Agr. 74) J 18:6. ἔπεσα πρὸς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ ὡς νεκρός Rv 1:17.—Abs. fall down GPt 5:18 v.l. Fall dead (Paradox. Vat. 37 Keller πίπτει; Mel., P. 26, 184 πρηνὴς δὲ ἔπιπτε σιγῶν) Ac 5:5, 10; 1 Cor 10:8 (cp. Ex 32:28); Hb 3:17 (Num 14:29). Specifically fall in battle (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 233 D.; Appian, Hann. 56 §236; Jos., Vi. 341; 354) Lk 21:24 (cp. στόμα 4 and Sir 28:18; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010, 3–11 σὺ ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ πεσῇ … πεσοῦνται ἐν μαχαίρῃ]).
    ב. fall down, throw oneself to the ground as a sign of devotion or humility, before high-ranking persons or divine beings, esp. when one approaches w. a petition (LXX; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 29 [Stone p. 48]; JosAs 14:4; ApcSed 14:2), abs. Mt 2:11; 4:9; 18:26, 29; Rv 5:14; 19:4; 22:8 (in all these places [except Mt 18:29] π. is closely connected w. προσκυνεῖν [as Jos., Ant. 10, 213 after Da 3:5 and ApcMos 27]. Sim. in many of the places already mentioned). W. var. words added (Jos., Ant. 10, 11 πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον τ. θεὸν ἱκέτευε; Gen 17:3, 17; Num 14:5) ἐπὶ πρόσωπον (αὐτοῦ, αὐτῶν) Mt 17:6; 26:39; Lk 5:12; 17:16 (ἐπὶ πρόσωπον παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ); 1 Cor 14:25; ἐπὶ τὰ πρόσωπα αὐτῶν Rv 7:11; 11:16; ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς Mk 14:35. Further, the one to whom devotion is given can be added in var. ways: ἐνώπιόν τινος (cp. 2 Km 3:34) Rv 4:10; 5:8; 7:11. ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ποδῶν τινος 19:10. εἰς τοὺς πόδας τινός (Diog. L. 2, 79) Mt 18:29 v.l.; J 11:32 v.l. ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας Ac 10:25 (v.l. adds αὐτοῦ). παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τινός Lk 8:41; 17:16 (s. above). πρὸς τοὺς πόδας τινός Mk 5:22; J 11:32; Ac 10:25 D; Hv 3, 2, 3.
    β. of things, esp. structures fall, fall to pieces, collapse, go down (Appian, Iber. 54 §228; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 192, Ant. 16, 18) of the σκηνὴ Δαυίδ (σκηνή end) Ac 15:16 (Am 9:11). Of a house fall (in) (Diod S 11, 63, 2 τῶν οἰκιῶν πιπτουσῶν; Dio Chrys. 6, 61; 30 [47], 25; Aristeas Hist.: 725 Fgm. 1, 3 Jac. [in Eus., PE 9, 25, 3]; Job 1:19) Mt 7:25, 27; Lk 6:49 v.l. (Diod S 15, 12, 2 τῶν οἰκιῶν πιπτουσῶν because of the influx of the ποταμός). τὰ τείχη Ἰεριχὼ ἔπεσαν Hb 11:30 (cp. Josh 6:5, 20.—Appian, Bell. Civ. 1, 112 §524; Ael. Aristid. 25, 42 K.=43 p. 813 D.: τὰ τείχη π.). ἐφʼ οὓς ἔπεσεν ὁ πύργος upon whom the tower fell Lk 13:4 (of a πύργος X., Hell. 5, 2, 5; Arrian, Anab. 6, 7, 5; Polyaenus 6, 50; Jos., Bell. 5, 292; SibOr 11, 12.—π. ἐπί τινα Job 1:19). οἶκος ἐπὶ οἶκον πίπτει house falls upon house 11:17 (Jülicher, Gleichn. 221f). Of a city (Oenomaus in Eus., PE 5, 25, 6) Ox 1, 18f (=GTh 32); cp. Rv 11:13; 16:19.—Fig. become invalid, come to an end, fail (Pla., Euthyphr. 14d; Philostrat., Ep. 9) Lk 16:17 (cp. Josh 23:14 v.l.; Ruth 3:18); 1 Cor 13:8.
    to experience loss of status or condition, fall, be destroyed, in ext. sense of 1.
    fall, be destroyed ἔπεσεν, ἔπεσεν Βαβυλών (Β. as symbol of humans in opposition to God and God’s people; cp. Is 21:9; Jer 28:8.; Just., D. 49, 8.—Repetition of the verb for emphasis as Sappho, Fgm. 131 D.2 οὔκετι ἴξω … οὔκετι ἴξω [Campbell 114 p. 138: οὐκέτι ἤξω … οὐκέτι ἤξω]; Aristoph., Equ. 247; M. Ant. 5, 7; Ps.-Libanius, Char. Ep. p. 33, 5 ἐρῶ, ἐρῶ. This is to remove all possibility of doubt, as Theod. Prodr. 5, 66 εἶδον, εἶδον=‘I have really seen’; Theocr. 14, 24 ἔστι Λύκος, Λύκος ἐστί=it really is a wolf; in Rv w. focus on lamentation, s. reff. Schwyzer II 60) Rv 14:8; 18:2.
    fall in a transcendent or moral sense, be completely ruined (Polyb. 1, 35, 5; Diod S 13, 37, 5; Pr 11:28; Sir 1:30; 2:7; TestGad 4:3)=fall from a state of grace Ro 11:11 (fig. w. πταίω [q.v. 1]), 22; Hb 4:11 (perh. w. ref. to the final judgment). Also in a less severe sense= go astray morally τοὺς πεπτωκότας ἔγειρον 1 Cl 59:4.—In wordplay ‘stand and fall’ (cp. Pr 24:16) Ro 14:4; 1 Cor 10:12; 2 Cl 2:6. μνημόνευε πόθεν πέπτωκες remember (the heights) from which you have fallen Rv 2:5.
    ὑπὸ κρίσιν π. fall under condemnation Js 5:12 (on π. ὑπό τι cp. Diod S 4, 17, 5 π. ὑπʼ ἐξουσίαν [Just., D. 105, 4]; Herodian 1, 4, 2; 2 Km 22:39; Tat. 8, 2 ὑπὸ τὴν εἱμαρμένην; Hippol., Ref. 4, 3, 5 ὑπὸ τὴν ἐπίσκεψιν fall under scrutiny; Did., Gen. 211, 5 ὑπὸ κατάραν; Theoph. Ant. 2, 25 [p. 162, 12] ὑπὸ θάνατον).
    π. … εἰς νόσον καὶ ἔσχατον κίνδυνον in sickness and extreme peril AcPl Ha 4, 15.
    fall, perish (Philo, Aet. M. 128) πίπτοντος τοῦ Ἰσραήλ B 12:5. οἱ πέντε ἔπεσαν five have perished, disappeared, passed from the scene Rv 17:10 (cp. also π.=‘die’ Job 14:10).—B. 671. DELG. M-M. TW. Spicq.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πίπτω

  • 12 προσεχής

    προσεχ-ής, ές, of Place,
    A next to, π. σφίσι ἑστάναι, in battle, Hdt.9.28, cf. 102;

    νῆσος -εστάτη τῇ ἠπείρῳ Str.14.6.1

    ; ἔπλωον προσεχέες τῇ γῇ keeping close to.., Arr.Ind.33: c. gen., π. τῶν κρημνῶν (fort. τῷ κρημνῷ)

    νάπη D.H.1.32

    ; οὐδέν ἐστιν ἑτέρου λίθου π. σιδήρῳ καὶ κόλλῃ attached with.., Paus.8.37.3.
    b in geogr. sense, bordering upon, adjoining, c. dat.,

    Λίβυες οἱ π. Αἰγύπτῳ Hdt.3.91

    : c. gen.,

    τὸ π. τοῦ κάτω κόσμου Arist.Mete. 340b12

    , cf. Paus.8.4.3: abs., οἱ προσεχέες their next neighbours, Hdt.3.89,93.
    2 exposed to the wind,

    π. ἀκταὶ τοῖς ἐτησίαις Anon.

    ap. Suid.;

    π. αἰγιαλὸς Λιβί Str.5.3.6

    : abs.,

    π. καὶ ἀλίμενος Id.4.6.2

    , cf. 5.4.4, D.H.3.44.
    3 closely connected,

    τὰ -έστατα τῶν εἰδῶν ἐνυπάρχει τῷ γένει Ph.1.17

    : [comp] Comp.,

    - έστερον νῷ Plot.5.4.2

    : hence, appropriate, suitable, proper,

    ὑποθῆκαι π. τῇ πολιτικῇ διοικήσει Phld.Rh.2.272

    S.;

    κυριώτατα καὶ -έστατα ὀνόματα D.H. Comp.3

    ;

    ἄγαλμα -έστατον τῇ λύρᾳ Philostr.Im.1.10

    ; παραδείγματα Aps.p.280 H. ([comp] Comp.).
    4 proximate, immediate, particular, κατὰ τὸ π. καὶ ἀκριβές, opp. κατὰ τὸν ἀνωτάτω λόγον, Placit.4.4.1; κατὰ τὸ π., opp. κατὰ κοινόν, Sor.2.44, cf. 1.4; τὰ π. καλούμενα μόρια (of the lower limb, viz. thigh, foot, etc.) Gal.7.735, cf. 1.465; τὸ π. τῆς φύσεως αὐτῆς (sc. τῆς ψυχῆς ) its particular nature, Plot.4.2.1;

    ἡ π. αἰτία Procl.Inst.31

    ;

    ὁ π. τοῦ κόσμου δημιουργός Jul.Gal. 99d

    . Adv. - χῶς immediately, Id.Or.5.175a, Plot.2.1.5; τὰ π. γεννητικά τινος proximate sources or origins, Gal.5.677;

    π. συνηρτημένος Iamb.Myst.5.9

    , cf. Porph.Intr.4.32, Dam.Pr. 102, al.
    5 connected by relationship, Sch.Pi.N.3.45 ([comp] Comp.).
    II of Time, recently, Paul.Aeg.6.118.
    2 in [dialect] Dor. form [full] ποτεχεῖ (q.v.).
    III attentive, Procl.in Euc.p.208 F. ([comp] Comp.). Adv.

    - χῶς Phld.Rh.2.259

    S.; glossed σπουδαίως, Hsch.: [comp] Comp.

    -έστερον, τὸ γάλα κρίνειν Sor.1.90

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > προσεχής

  • 13 καί

    καί conjunction (Hom.+), found most frequently by far of all Gk. particles in the NT; since it is not only used much more commonly here than in other Gk. lit. but oft. in a different sense, or rather in different circumstances, it contributes greatly to some of the distinctive coloring of the NT style.—HMcArthur, ΚΑΙ Frequency in Greek Letters, NTS 15, ’68/69, 339–49. The vivacious versatility of κ. (for earlier Gk. s. Denniston 289–327) can easily be depressed by the tr. ‘and’, whose repetition in a brief area of text lacks the support of arresting aspects of Gk. syntax.
    marker of connections, and
    single words
    α. gener. Ἰάκωβος καὶ Ἰωσὴφ καὶ Σίμων καὶ Ἰούδας Mt 13:55. χρυσὸν καὶ λίβανον καὶ σμύρναν 2:11. ἡ ἐντολὴ ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή Ro 7:12. πολυμερῶς κ. πολυτρόπως Hb 1:1. ὁ θεὸς κ. πατήρ God, who is also the Father 1 Cor 15:24; cp. 2 Cor 1:3; 11:31; Eph 1:3; Js 1:27; 3:9 al.—Connects two occurrences of the same word for emphasis (OGI 90, 19 [196 B.C.] Ἑρμῆς ὁ μέγας κ. μέγας; pap in Mayser II/1, 54) μείζων κ. μείζων greater and greater Hv 4, 1, 6. ἔτι κ. ἔτι again and again B 21:4; Hs 2, 6 (B-D-F §493, 1; 2; s. Rob. 1200).
    β. w. numerals, w. the larger number first δέκα καὶ ὁκτώ Lk 13:16. τεσσεράκοντα κ. ἕξ J 2:20. τετρακόσιοι κ. πεντήκοντα Ac 13:20.—The καί in 2 Cor 13:1 ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα=‘or’ ([v.l. ἢ τριῶν for καὶ τριῶν as it reads Mt 18:16]; cp. Js 4:13 v.l. σήμερον καὶ αὔριον=‘today or tomorrow’, but s. above all Thu. 1, 82, 2; Pla., Phd. 63e; X., De Re Equ. 4, 4 ἁμάξας τέτταρας καὶ πέντε; Heraclides, Pol. 58 τρεῖς καὶ τέσσαρας; Polyb. 3, 51, 12 ἐπὶ δυεῖν καὶ τρισὶν ἡμέραις; 5, 90, 6; Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 2, 28 εἷς καὶ δύο=one or two; schol. on Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1091 p. 305, 22 W. τριέτης καὶ τετραέτης) by the statement of two or three witnesses every charge must be sustained, as explained by Dt 19:15.
    γ. adding the whole to the part and in general (Aristoph., Nub. 1239 τὸν Δία καὶ τοὺς θεούς; Thu. 1, 116, 3; 7, 65, 1) Πέτρος καὶ οἱ ἀπόστολοι Peter and the rest of the apostles Ac 5:29. οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς κ. τὸ συνέδριον ὅλον the high priest and all the rest of the council Mt 26:59. Vice versa, adding a (specially important) part to the whole and especially (πᾶς Ἰουδὰ καὶ Ἰερουσαλήμ 2 Ch 35:24; cp. 32, 33; 1 Macc 2:6) τοῖς μαθηταῖς κ. τῷ Πέτρῳ Mk 16:7. σὺν γυναιξὶ κ. Μαριάμ Ac 1:14.
    δ. The expr. connected by καί can be united in the form of a hendiadys (Alcaeus 117, 9f D.2 χρόνος καὶ καρπός=time of fruit; Soph., Aj. 144; 749; Polyb. 6, 9, 4; 6, 57, 5 ὑπεροχὴ καὶ δυναστεία=1, 2, 7; 5, 45, 1 ὑπεροχὴ τῆς δυναστείας; Diod S 5, 67, 3 πρὸς ἀνανέωσιν καὶ μνήμην=renewal of remembrance; 15, 63, 2 ἀνάγκη καὶ τύχη=compulsion of fate; 16, 93, 2 ἐπιβουλὴ κ. θάνατος=a fatal plot; Jos., Ant. 12, 98 μετὰ χαρᾶς κ. βοῆς=w. a joyful cry; 17, 82 ἀκρίβεια κ. φυλακή) ἐξίσταντο ἐπὶ τῇ συνέσει καὶ ταῖς ἀποκρίσεσιν αὐτοῦ they were amazed at his intelligent answers Lk 2:47. δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα κ. σοφίαν I will give you wise utterance 21:15. τροφὴ κ. εὐφροσύνη joy concerning (your) food Ac 14:17. ἐλπὶς κ. ἀνάστασις hope of a resurrection 23:6 (2 Macc 3:29 ἐλπὶς καὶ σωτηρία; s. OLagercrantz, ZNW 31, ’32, 86f; GBjörck, ConNeot 4, ’40, 1–4).
    ε. A colloquial feature is the coordination of two verbs, one of which should be a ptc. (s. B-D-F §471; Rob. 1135f) ἀποτολμᾷ κ. λέγει = ἀποτολμῶν λέγει he is so bold as to say Ro 10:20. ἔσκαψεν κ. ἐβάθυνεν (=βαθύνας) Lk 6:48. ἐκρύβη κ. ἐξῆλθεν (=ἐξελθών) J 8:59. Sim. χαίρων κ. βλέπων I am glad to see Col 2:5. Linking of subordinate clause and ptc. Μαριὰμ ὡς ἦλθεν … καὶ ἰδοῦσα J 11:32 v.l. Cp. παραλαβών … καὶ ἀνέβη Lk 9:28 v.l.
    clauses and sentences
    α. gener.: ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει κ. τέξεται υἱόν Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). εἰσῆλθον … κ. ἐδίδασκον Ac 5:21. διακαθαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα αὐτοῦ κ. συνάξει τὸν σῖτον Mt 3:12. κεκένωται ἡ πίστις καὶ κατήργηται ἡ ἐπαγγελία Ro 4:14 and very oft. Connecting two questions Mt 21:23, or quotations (e.g. Ac 1:20), and dialogue (Lk 21:8), or alternate possibilities (13:18).
    β. Another common feature is the practice, drawn fr. Hebrew or fr. the speech of everyday life, of using κ. as a connective where more discriminating usage would call for other particles: καὶ εἶδον καὶ (for ὅτι) σεισμὸς ἐγένετο Rv 6:12. καὶ ἤκουσεν ὁ βασιλεὺς … καὶ (for ὅτι) ἔλεγον and the king learned that they were saying Mk 6:14 (s. HLjungvik, ZNW 33, ’34, 90–92; on this JBlinzler, Philol. 96, ’43/44, 119–31). τέξεται υἱὸν καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ (for οὗ τὸ ὄνομα καλ.) Mt 1:21; cp. Lk 6:6; 11:44. καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶναι καὶ ποιήσωμεν σκηνάς Mk 9:5. Esp. freq. is the formula in historical narrative καὶ ἐγένετο … καὶ (like וַ … וַיְהִי) and it happened or came about … that Mt 9:10; Mk 2:15; Lk 5:1 v.l. (for ἐγένετο δὲ … καὶ; so also the text of 6:12), 12, 17; 14:1; 17:11 al. (Gen 7:10 al.; JosAs 11:1; 22:1). S. MJohannessohn, Das bibl. Καὶ ἐγένετο u. seine Geschichte, 1926 (fr. ZVS 35, 1925, 161–212); KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 29–62; Mlt-Turner 334f; ÉDelebecque, Études Grecques sur L’Évangile de Luc ’76, 123–65; JVoelz, The Language of the NT: ANRW II/25/2, 893–977, esp. 959–64.—As in popular speech, κ. is used in rapid succession Mt 14:9ff; Mk 1:12ff; Lk 18:32ff; J 2:13ff; 1 Cor 12:5f; Rv 6:12ff; 9:1ff. On this kind of colloquial speech, which joins independent clauses rather than subordinating one to the other (parataxis rather than hypotaxis) s. B-D-F §458; Rdm.2 p. 222; Rob. 426; Dssm., LO 105ff (LAE 129ff), w. many references and parallels fr. secular sources. This is a favorite, e.g., in Polyaenus 2, 3, 2–4; 2, 4, 3; 3, 9, 10; 3, 10, 2; 4, 6, 1; 7, 36 al.
    γ. It is also coordination rather than subordination when κ. connects an expr. of time with that which occurs in the time (Od. 5, 362; Hdt. 7, 217; Thu. 1, 50, 5; Pla., Symp. 220c; Aeschin. 3, 71 νὺξ ἐν μέσῳ καὶ παρῆμεν; s. B-D-F §442, 4; KBrugmann4-AThumb, Griechische Gramm. 1913, 640*): ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα κ. παραδίδοται the time has come when he is to be given up Mt 26:45. κ. ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν when they crucified him Mk 15:25. κ. ἀνέβη εἰς Ἰεροσόλυμα when he went up to Jerusalem J 2:13. κ. συντελέσω when I will make Hb 8:8 (Jer 38:31); cp. J 4:35; 7:33; Lk 19:43; 23:44; Ac 5:7.
    δ. καί introducing an apodosis is really due to Hebr./LXX infl. (B-D-F §442, 7; Abel §78a, 6 p. 341; Mlt-H. 422; KBeyer, Semitische Syntax im NT I, 1 ’62, 66–72; but not offensive to ears trained in good Gk.: s. Il. 1, 478; Hdt. 1, 79, 2; sim.Thu. 2, 93, 4 ὡς ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐχώρουν εὐθύς; 8, 27, 5; Herm. Wr. 13, 1 …, καὶ ἔφης; Delebecque [s. above in β] 130–32) καὶ ὅτε ἐπλήσθησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ …, κ. ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 3:20. Also κ. ἰδού in an apodosis Lk 7:12; Ac 1:10.
    ε. connecting negative and affirmative clauses Lk 3:14. οὔτε ἄντλημα ἔχεις κ. τὸ φρέαρ ἐστὶ βαθύ you have no bucket, and the well is deep J 4:11; cp. 3J 10 (οὔτε … καί Eur., Iph. Taur. 591f; Longus, Past. 1, 17; 4, 28; Aelian, NA 1, 57; 11, 9; Lucian, Dial. Meretr. 2, 4 οὔτε πάντα ἡ Λεσβία, Δωρί, πρὸς σὲ ἐψεύσατο καὶ σὺ τἀληθῆ ἀπήγγελκας Μυρτίῳ ‘It wasn’t all lies that Lesbia told you, Doris; and you certainly reported the truth to Myrtium’). After a negative clause, which influences the clause beginning w. καί: μήποτε καταπατήσουσιν … κ. στραφέντες ῥήξωσιν ὑμᾶς Mt 7:6; cp. 5:25; 10:38; 13:15 (Is 6:10); 27:64; Lk 12:58; 21:34; J 6:53; 12:40 (Is 6:10); Ac 28:27 (Is 6:10); 1 Th 3:5; Hb 12:15; Rv 16:15.
    ζ. to introduce a result that comes fr. what precedes: and then, and so Mt 5:15; 23:32; Mk 8:34; 2 Cor 11:9; Hb 3:19; 1J 3:19. καὶ ἔχομεν and so we have 2 Pt 1:19. Esp. after the impv., or expr. of an imperatival nature (Soph., Oed. Col. 1410ff θέσθε … καὶ … οἴσει, El. 1207; Sir 2:6; 3:17) δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου καὶ ποιήσω and then I will make Mt 4:19. εἰπὲ λόγῳ, κ. ἰαθήσεται ὁ παῖς μου speak the word, and then my servant will be cured Mt 8:8; Lk 7:7; cp. Mt 7:7; Mk 6:22; Lk 10:28; J 14:16; Js 4:7, 10; Rv 4:1.—καί introduces a short clause that confirms the existence of someth. that ought to be: ἵνα τέκνα θεοῦ κληθῶμεν, καὶ ἐσμέν that we should be called children of God; and so we really are (καλέω 1d) 1J 3:1 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 40 §161 they were to conquer Sardinia, καὶ κατέλαβον=and they really took it; 4, 127 §531 one day would decide [κρίνειν] the fate of Rome, καὶ ἐκρίθη).
    η. emphasizing a fact as surprising or unexpected or noteworthy: and yet, and in spite of that, nevertheless (Eur., Herc. Fur. 509; Philostrat., Her. 11 [II 184, 29 Kayser] ῥητορικώτατον καὶ δεινόν; Longus, Past. 4, 17 βουκόλος ἦν Ἀγχίσης καὶ ἔσχεν αὐτὸν Ἀφροδίτη) κ. σὺ ἔρχῃ πρὸς μέ; and yet you come to me? Mt 3:14; cp. 6:26; 10:29; Mk 12:12; J 1:5, 10; 3:11, 32; 5:40; 6:70; 7:28; 1 Cor 5:2; 2 Cor 6:9; Hb 3:9 (Ps 94:9); Rv 3:1. So also, connecting what is unexpected or otherw. noteworthy with an attempt of some kind (JBlomqvist, Das sogennante και adversativum ’79): but ζητεῖ κ. οὐχ εὑρίσκει but he finds none (no resting place) Mt 12:43. ἐπεθύμησαν ἰδεῖν κ. οὐχ εἶδαν but did not see (it) 13:17; cp. 26:60; Lk 13:7; 1 Th 2:18. Cp. GJs 18:3 (not pap). Perhaps Mk 5:20. Introducing a contrasting response καὶ ἀποδώσεις μοι Hv 2, 1, 3.
    θ. to introduce an abrupt question, which may often express wonder, ill-will, incredulity, etc. (B-D-F §442, 8. For older lit. exx. of this usage s. Kühner-G. II p. 247f; for later times EColwell, The Gk. of the Fourth Gospel ’31, 87f): κ. πόθεν μοι τοῦτο; how have I deserved this? Lk 1:43. κ. τίς; who then? Mk 10:26; Lk 10:29; J 9:36. καὶ τί γέγονεν ὅτι … ; how does it happen that … ? 14:22. καὶ πῶς σὺ λέγεις … ; how is it, then, that you say … J 14:9 v.l. W. a protasis εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, κ. τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με; for if I make you sad, who then will cheer me up? 2 Cor 2:2 (cp. Ps.-Clem., Hom. 2, 43; 44 εἰ [ὁ θεὸς] ψεύδεται, καὶ τίς ἀληθεύει;). Thus Phil 1:22 is prob. to be punctuated as follows (s. ADebrunner, GGA 1926, 151): εἰ δὲ τὸ ζῆν ἐν σαρκί, τοῦτο μοι καρπὸς ἔργου, καὶ τί αἱρήσομαι; οὐ γνωρίζω but if living on here means further productive work, then which shall I choose? I really don’t know. καὶ πῶς αὐτοῦ υἱός ἐστιν; how, then, is he his son? Lk 20:44 (cp. Gen 39:9).
    ι. to introduce a parenthesis (Eur., Orest. 4, Hel. 393; X., Equ. 11, 2.—B-D-F §465, 1; Rob. 1182) κ. ἐκωλύθην ἄρχι τοῦ δεῦρο but so far I have been prevented Ro 1:13.
    oft. explicative; i.e., a word or clause is connected by means of καί w. another word or clause, for the purpose of explaining what goes before it and so, that is, namely (PPetr II, 18 [1], 9 πληγὰς … καὶ πλείους=blows … indeed many of them.—Kühner-G. II 247; B-D-F §442, 9; Rob. 1181; Mlt-Turner 335) χάριν κ. ἀποστολήν grace, that is, the office of an apostle Ro 1:5. ἀπήγγειλαν πάντα καὶ τὰ τ. δαιμονιζομένων they told everything, namely what had happened to those who were possessed Mt 8:33. καὶ χάριν ἀντὶ χάριτος that is, grace upon grace J 1:16. Cp. 1 Cor 3:5; 15:38.—Mt 21:5.—Other explicative uses are καὶ οὗτος, καὶ τοῦτο, καὶ ταῦτα (the first and last are in earlier Gk.: Hdt., X. et al.; s. Kühner-G. I 647; II 247) and, also ascensive and indeed, and at that Ἰ. Χρ., καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον J. Chr., (and) indeed him on the cross 1 Cor 2:2. καὶ τοῦτο Ro 13:11; 1 Cor 6:6, 8; Eph 2:8. καὶ ταῦτα w. ptc. and to be sure Hb 11:12. See B-D-F §290, 5; 425, 1; 442, 9.—The ascensive force of καί is also plain in Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον a Roman citizen, and uncondemned at that Ac 22:25. ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν ἐστιν an hour is coming, indeed it is already here J 5:25. προσέθηκεν καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ πᾶσιν καὶ κατέκλεισεν τὸν Ἰωάννην ἐν φυλακῇ added this on top of everything else, namely to put John in prison Lk 3:20.
    After πολύς and before a second adj. καί is pleonastic fr. the viewpoint of modern lang. (earlier Gk.: Hom. et al. [Kühner-G. II 252, 1]; cp. Cebes 1, 1 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα ἀναθήματα; 2, 3; B-D-F §442, 11) πολλὰ … κ. ἄλλα σημεῖα many other signs J 20:30 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 318). πολλὰ κ. βαρέα αἰτιώματα many severe charges Ac 25:7. πολλὰ … καὶ ἕτερα Lk 3:18 (cp. Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 6 πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα). πολλοὶ καὶ ἀνυπότακτοι Tit 1:10.
    introducing someth. new, w. loose connection: Mt 4:23; 8:14, 23, 28; 9:1, 9, 27, 35; 10:1; 12:27; Mk 5:1, 21; Lk 8:26; J 1:19 and oft.
    καί … καί both … and, not only …, but also (Synes., Dreams 10 p. 141b καὶ ἀπιστεῖν ἔξεστι καὶ πιστεύειν.—B-D-F §444, 3; Rob. 1182; Mlt-Turner 335) connecting single expressions Mt 10:28; Mk 4:41; Ro 11:33; Phil 2:13; 4:12. κ. ἐν ὀλίγῳ κ. ἐν μεγάλῳ Ac 26:29. κ. ἅπαξ κ. δίς (s. ἅπαξ 1) Phil 4:16; 1 Th 2:18. Connecting whole clauses or sentences: Mk 9:13; J 7:28; 9:37; 12:28; 1 Cor 1:22. Introducing contrasts: although … yet (Anthol. VII, 676 Δοῦλος Ἐπίκτητος γενόμην καὶ σῶμʼ ἀνάπηρος καὶ πενίην ῏Ιρος καὶ φίλος ἀθανάτοις ‘I was Epictetus, a slave; crippled in body and an Iros [a beggar in Hom., Od.] in poverty, but dear to the Immortals’) J 15:24; Ac 23:3. καὶ … κ. οὐ Lk 5:36; J 6:36. καὶ οὐ … καί 17:25; κ. … κ. now … now Mk 9:22. On τὲ … καί s. τέ 2c. Somet. w. ἤ q.v. 1aβ.—HCadbury, Superfluous καί in the Lord’s Prayer (i.e. Mt 6:12) and Elsewhere: Munera Studiosa (=WHatch Festschr.) ’46.
    marker to indicate an additive relation that is not coordinate to connect clauses and sentences, also, likewise, funct. as an adv.
    simply κ. τὴν ἄλλην the other one also Mt 5:39; cp. vs. 40; 6:21; 12:45; Mk 1:38; 2:26; 8:7 and oft. Freq. used w. pronouns κἀγώ (q.v.). καὶ σύ Mt 26:73. κ. ὑμεῖς 20:4, 7; Lk 21:31; J 7:47 and oft. κ. αὐτός (s. αὐτός 1f).
    intensive: even Mt 5:46f; 10:30; Mk 1:27; Lk 10:17; J 14:9 v.l.; Ac 5:39; 22:28; Ro 9:24 (ἀλλὰ καί); 1 Cor 2:10; 2 Cor 1:8; Gal 2:17; Eph 5:12; Phlm 21; Hb 7:25; 1 Pt 4:19 (but s. d below); Jd 23; Hs 5, 2, 10; 7:1; ἔτι καὶ νῦν Dg 2:3. CBlackman, JBL 87, ’68, 203f would transl. Ro 3:26b: even in the act of declaring righteous (cp. the gen. abs. Polemon Soph. B 14 Reader καὶ Δάτιδος ἀποπλέοντος=even though Datis was sailing away). In formulas expressing a wish: ὄφελον καί if only, would that Gal 5:12. In connection w. a comparative: κ. περισσότερον προφήτου one who is even more than a prophet Mt 11:9. κ. μείζονα ποιήσει J 14:12.
    In sentences denoting a contrast καί appears in var. ways, somet. in both members of the comparison, and oft. pleonastically, to our way of thinking καθάπερ …, οὕτως καί as …, thus also 2 Cor 8:11. ὥσπερ …, οὕτως καί (Hyperid. 1, 2, 5–8) Ro 5:19; 11:30f; 1 Cor 11:12; 15:22; Gal 4:29. ὡς …, οὕτως καί Ro 5:15, 18. ὸ̔ν τρόπον …, οὕτως καί 2 Ti 3:8.—οὕτως καί thus also Ro 6:11. ὡσαύτως καί in the same way also 1 Cor 11:25. ὁμοίως καί (Jos., Bell. 2, 575) J 6:11; Jd 8. ὡς καί Ac 11:17; 1 Cor 7:7; 9:5. καθὼς καί Ro 15:7; 1 Cor 13:12; 2 Cor 1:14; Eph 4:17. καθάπερ καί Ro 4:6; 2 Cor 1:14.—καί can also stand alone in the second member w. the mng. so also, so. ὡς … καί Mt 6:10; Ac 7:51; Gal 1:9; Phil 1:20. καθὼς … καί Lk 6:31 v.l.; J 6:57; 13:15; 1 Cor 15:49.—οἷος …, τοιοῦτος καί 1 Cor 15:48. After a comp. ὅσῳ καί by so much also Hb 8:6. καί is found in both members of the comparison (s. Kühner-G. II 256; 2 Macc 2:10; 6:14) Ro 1:13; 1 Th 2:14. καθὼς καὶ … οὕτως καί Col 3:13 (cp. Hyperid. 1, 40, 20–25 ὥσπερ καὶ … οὕτω καί; 3, 38).
    w. expressions that introduce cause or result, here also pleonastic to a considerable degree διὰ τοῦτο καί for this reason (also) Lk 11:49; J 12:18. διὸ καί Lk 1:35; Ac 10:29; Ro 4:22; Hb 13:12. εἰς τοῦτο καί 2 Cor 2:9. ὥστε καί 1 Pt 4:19 (but this pass. may well fit in b). ὅθεν καί Hb 7:25; 11:19.
    after an interrogative (as Thu., X., et al.; s. Kühner-G. II 255. S. also B-D-F §442, 14) at all, still ἱνατί καὶ τ. γῆν καταργεῖ; Lk 13:7. τί καί; (Hyperid. 3, 14 τί καὶ ἀδικεῖ; what kind of wrong, then, is he committing?) τί καὶ ἐλπίζει; why does he still (need to) hope? Ro 8:24. v.l. τί καὶ βαπτίζονται; why are they baptized (at all)? 1 Cor 15:29; cp. vs. 30.
    used w. a relative, it oft. gives greater independence to the foll. relative clause: Mk 3:14; Lk 10:30; J 11:2 v.l.; Ac 1:3, 11; 7:45; 10:39; 11:30; 12:4; 13:22; 28:10; Ro 9:24; 1 Cor 11:23; Gal 2:10; Col 1:29 al.
    used pleonastically w. prep.
    α. μετά (BGU 412, 6 μετὰ καὶ τ. υἱοῦ) Phil 4:3.
    β. σύν (ins in PASA III 612; PFay 108; BGU 179, 19; 515, 17) 1 Cl 65:1.—Dssm., NB 93 (BS 265f).
    w. double names ὁ καί who is also called … (the earliest ex. in a fragment of Ctesias: 688 Fgm. 15, 51 p. 469, 23 Jac. ῏Ωχος καὶ Δαρειαῖος [s. Hatch 141]; OGI 565; 574; 583; 589; 603; 604; 620; 623; 636; POxy 45; 46; 54; 101; 485; 1279; PFay 30; BGU 22, 25; 36, 4; Jos., Ant. 1, 240; 5, 85; 12, 285; 13, 320; 18, 35. Further material in WSchmid, Der Atticismus III 1893, 338; Dssm., B 181ff [BS 313–17]. Lit. in B-D-F §268, 1) Σαῦλος, ὁ καὶ Παῦλος Ac 13:9. Ἰγνάτιος, ὁ καὶ Θεοφόρος ins of all the letters of Ign.
    with other particles
    α. καὶ γάρ for (s. γάρ 1b).—καὶ γὰρ … ἀλλά (or granted that … but) 2 Cor 13:4; Phil 2:27.—καὶ γὰρ οὐ(κ): neither 1 Cor 11:9; for even … not 2 Cor 3:10.
    β. καί γε (without intervening word [opp. earlier Gk, e.g. Pla., Phd. 58d; Rep. 7, 531a]: Hippocr., Septim. 9, VII 450 Littré; Cornutus p. 40, 12; Περὶ ὕψους 13, 2; Rhetor Apsines [III A.D.] p. 332, 17 Hammer; TestReub 4:4 al.; for גָּם always in Theod. [DBarthélemy, Les devanciers d’Aquila ’63, 31ff]), weakened force: (if) only or at least Lk 19:42 v.l.; intensive: indeed (Jos. Ant 29, 19) Ac 2:18 (J 3:2 v.l.; Mel., P. 30, 207); Hm 8:5; 9:9. καί γε οὐ μακράν= and indeed God is not far Ac 17:27.—Kühner-G. II 176b; Schwyzer II 561; B-D-F §439, 2; Rdm.2 35–37.
    γ. καὶ … δέ and also, but also (s. δέ 5b).
    δ. καίτοι (Il. 13, 267 et al., ins, pap; 4 Macc 2:6; 5:18; 7:13; Ath. 8, 1 al.; Mel., P. 58, 422) particle (B-D-F §425, 1; 450, 3; Rob. 1129 and 1154) w. finite verb (Chion, Ep. 3, 1; Jos. Ant. 5, 78) yet, on the other hand Ac 14:17. W. gen. abs. foll. (BGU 850, 4 [76 A.D.] καίτοι ἐμοῦ σε πολλὰ ἐρωτήσαντος; 898, 26; Philo, Vi. Mos. 1, 20; Jos., Ant. 2, 321; Ath. 19, 2; 25, 2) Hb 4:3.—καίτοι γε or καί τοι γε (since Aristoph., Ach. 611; but esp. in later Gk. [cp. Schwyzer II 561; MMeister, De Aiocho dial., Breslau diss. 1915 p. 31, 5]; Ps.-Pla., Axioch. 364b; Jos., Bell. 1, 7, Ant. 5, 36; Epict. 3, 24, 90; Just., A II, 11, 2; D. 7, 3; Ath. 3, 1; 22, 7; SIG 685, 76 and 82 [139 B.C.]) although J 4:2; Ac 14:17 v.l.; Dg 8:3. W. part. foll. (Jos., C. Ap. 1, 230; Mel., P. 58, 422) AcPt Ox 849, 18.—Kühner-G. II 151f; B-D-F §439, 1; 450, 3.—For ἀλλὰ κ., δὲ και, ἐὰν κ., εἰ κ., ἢ κ. s. ἀλλά, δέ, ἐάν, εἰ, ἤ.—ERobson, KAI-Configurations in the Gk. NT, 3 vols. diss. Syracuse ’79. LfgrE s.v. καί col. 1273f (lit.). DELG. M-M. EDNT.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καί

  • 14 περί

    περί, Thess., Delph. περ IG9(2).517.17 (iii B.C.), al., Schwyzer 323 A4 (v/iv B.C.), also [dialect] Aeol., v. infr. A. V ; Elean παρ ib.413.4: Prep. with gen., dat., and acc.:—
    A round about, all round (prop. different from ἀμφί, on both sides). (Cogn. with Skt. pári 'round about'.)
    A WITH GENITIVE,
    I of Place, sts. in Poets, round about, around,

    τετάνυστο π. σπείους ἡμερίς Od.5.68

    ;

    τείχη π. Δαρδανίας E. Tr. 818

    (lyr., s.v.l.);

    εἴλυμα π. χροός A.R.2.1129

    : rarely, like ἀμφί, on both sides, v. περιβαίνω 1 fin.
    2 about near,

    π. σοῦ πάντα γένοιτο ῥόδα IG14.2508

    ([place name] Nemausus).
    II to denote the object about or for which one does something:
    1 with Verbs of fighting or contending, π. τινός for an object—from the notion of the thing's lying in the middle to be fought about, π. τῶνδε for these prizes, Il.23.659 ;

    π. πτόλιος.. μαχήσεται 18.265

    ; π. Πατρόκλοιο θανόντος ib. 195, cf. 17.120;

    π. σεῖο 3.137

    ;

    π. νηὸς ἔχον πόνον 15.416

    ; ἀμύνεσθαι π. πάτρης, π. νηῶν, π. τέκνων, 12.243, 142, 170, etc.; δόλους καὶ μῆτιν ὕφαινον, ὥς τε π. ψυχῆς since it was for my life, Od.9.423 ;

    π. ψυχῆς θέον Ἕκτορος Il.22.161

    ;

    π. ψυχέων ἐμάχοντο Od.22.245

    ; in Prose, τρέχειν π. ἑωυτοῦ, π. τῆς ψυχῆς, Hdt.7.57,9.37;

    ἀγῶνας δραμέονται π. σφέων αὐτῶν Id.8.102

    ;

    νεναυμάχηκε τὴν π. τῶν κρεῶν Ar. Ra. 191

    ; <

    τὸν> π. τοῦ παντὸς δρόμον θέοντες Hdt.8.74

    ; κινδυνεύειν π. τινός ibid., etc.;

    οὐ π. τῶν ἴσων ὁ κίνδυνός ἐστι X.HG7.1.7

    ; and without a Verb,

    π. γῆς ὅρων διαφοραί Th.1.122

    ;

    π. πάντων ἀγαθῶν ὁ ἀγών X.Cyr. 3.3.44

    , cf. S.Aj. 936(lyr.), etc.;

    μάχη π. τινός Pl.Tht. 179d

    ;

    ἐπειγόμενοι π. νίκης Il.23.437

    , cf. 639, Hdt.8.26 ;

    πεῖραν θανάτου π. καὶ ζωᾶς ἀναβάλλεσθαι Pi.N.9.29

    ;

    π. θανάτου φεύγειν Antipho 5.95

    ; but ἐρίσσαι π. μύθων contend about speaking, i. e. who can speak best, Il.15.284 ;

    καὶ ἀθανάτοισιν ἐρίζεσκον π. τόξων Od.8.225

    , cf. 24.515.
    2 with words which denote care or anxiety, about, on account of,

    π. Τρώων.. μερμηρίζειν Il.20.17

    ;

    ἄχος π. τινός Od.21.249

    ;

    φόνου π. βουλεύειν 16.234

    ;

    φροντίζειν π. τινός Hdt.8.36

    , etc.;

    κήδεσθαι π. τ. S.Ph. 621

    ;

    δεδιέναι π. τ. Pl.Prt. 320a

    , etc.;

    ἀπολογεῖσθαι π. τ. X.Cyr.2.2.13

    ; κρίνειν, διαγιγνώσκειν π. τ., Pi.N.5.40, Antipho 5.96; π. τ. ψηφίζεσθαι, διαψηφίζεσθαι, ψῆφον φέρειν, IG12.57.42, X.HG2.3.50, Lycurg.11 ;

    βουλεύεσθαι π. τῆς κοινῆς σωτηρίας Isoc.5.69

    ;

    π. Μεθωναίων IG12.57.49

    ; διανοεῖσθαι, σκοπεῖν π. τινός, Pl.Phdr. 270d, Phd. 65e;

    μαντεύεσθαι π. τ. Hdt.8.36

    , cf. S.Tr.77 ; π. πότου γοῦν ἐστί σοι; so with you it is a question of drink? Ar.Eq.87, cf. Plu.2.43b.
    3 with Verbs of hearing, knowing, speaking, etc., about, concerning,

    π. νόστου ἄκουσα Od.19.270

    ;

    οἶδα γὰρ εὖ π. κείνου 17.563

    ;

    π. πομπῆς μνησόμεθα 7.191

    ;

    π. πατρὸς ἐρέσθαι 1.135

    , 3.77 ; π. τινὸς ἐρέειν, λέγειν, λόγον ποιήσασθαι, etc., Hdt. 1.5, S.OT 707, X.Cyr.1.6.13, etc.;

    λέγειν καὶ ἀκούειν π. ἑκάστου Th.4.22

    , etc.;

    λόγος π. τινός Pl.Prt. 347b

    , etc.;

    ἡ π. τινὸς φήμη Aeschin.1.48

    ; π. τινὸς ἀγγεῖλαι, κηρῦξαι, S.El. 1111, Ant. 193 ; π. τινὸς διελθεῖν, διεξελθεῖν, διηγεῖσθαι, Isoc.9.2, Pl.Plt. 274b, Euthphr.6c, etc.;

    παίζειν π. τινός X.Mem.1.3.8

    ;

    ἐμπειροτέρως ἔχειν π. τινός Aeschin.1.82

    ;

    νόμον γράψαι π. τινός X.HG2.3.52

    , etc.;

    νόμῳ χρῆσθαι π. τινός S.Ant. 214

    .
    4 of impulse or motive rather than object, ἐμαρνάσθην ἔριδος πέρι fought for very enmity, Il.7.301, cf. 16.476, 20.253.
    5 about, in regard to,

    μεμηνυμένος π. τινός Th.6.53

    ;

    οὕτως ἔσχε π. τοῦ πρήγματος τούτου Hdt.1.117

    ;

    τὰ π. τῶν Πλαταιῶν γεγενημένα Th.2.6

    ;

    τὸ π. τούτου γεγονός Plb.1.54.5

    : in Prose freq. without a Verb,

    ἡ π. τῶν Μαντινικῶν πρᾶξις Th.6.88

    ; τὰ π. τινός the circumstances of.., ib.32, 8.14,26, etc. (cf. infr. C. 1.5); οὕτω δὴ καὶ π. τῶν ἀρετῶν (sc. ἔχει) Pl.Men. 72c, cf. R. 534b, 551c, etc.; π. τοῦ καταλειφθῆναι τὸν σῖτον as for reserving the corn, PMich.Zen.28.5 (iii B.C.): without the Art., ἀριθμοῦ πέρι as to number, Hdt.7.102; χρηστηρίων δὲ πέρι .. Id.2.54.
    III before, above, beyond, of superiority, chiefly in [dialect] Ep.,

    π. πάντων ἔμμεναι ἄλλων Il.1.287

    ;

    π. δ' ἄλλων φασὶ γενέσθαι 4.375

    ;

    τετιμῆσθαι π. πάντων 9.38

    ;

    ὃν π. πάσης τῖεν ὁμηλικίης 5.325

    ;

    ὃν.. π. πάντων φίλατο παίδων 20.304

    ;

    π. πάντων ἴδριες ἀνδρῶν Od.7.108

    ;

    κρατερὸς π. πάντων Il.21.566

    , cf. 1.417, Od.11.216: in this sense freq. divided from its gen., π. φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων in understanding to be beyond them, Il.17.171, cf. 1.258, Od.1.66 ;

    π. μὲν εἶδος, π. δ' ἔργα τέτυκτο τῶν ἄλλων Δαναῶν Il.17.279

    ;

    π. μὲν κρατέεις, π. δ' αἴσυλα ῥέζεις ἀνδρῶν 21.214

    ;

    π. δ' ἔγχει Ἀχαιῶν φέρτατός ἐσσι 7.289

    , cf. Pi.O.6.50, Theoc. 25.119.—In this sense π. is sts. adverbial, and the gen. is absent, v. infr. E. II.
    IV in Hdt. and [dialect] Att. Prose, to denote value, ἡμῖν π. πολλοῦ ἐστι it is of much consequence, worth much, to us, Hdt.1. 120, cf. Antipho 6.3 ; π. πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαί τινας to reckon them for, i.e. worth, much, Hdt.1.73, X.Mem.2.3.10, etc.; π. πλείονος, π. πλείστου ποιεῖσθαι, Id.An.7.7.44, Cyr.7.5.60 ;

    π. πλείστου ἡγεῖσθαι Th.2.89

    ;

    π. παντὸς ποιεῖσθαι X.Cyr.1.4.1

    ; π. ἐλάττονος ἡγούμενοι, π. οὐδενὸς ἡγήσασθαι, Lys.2.71,31.31.
    V [dialect] Aeol. περί and περ = ὑπέρ, στροῦθοι περὶ γᾶς.. δίννεντες πτέρα Sapph.1.10; περ κεφάλας prob. in Alc.93, cf. 18 ;

    περρ ἁπαλῶ στύματός σε πεδέρχομαι Theoc.29.25

    ; also Hellenistic, ὃ διέγραψε Προῖτος περί μου paid on my behalf, PCair. Zen.790.23 (iii B. C.), cf. UPZ57.12 (ii B. C.).
    B WITH DATIVE (in [dialect] Att. Prose mostly in signf. 11, esp. in Th.),
    I of Place, round about, around, of close-fitting dresses, armour, etc.,

    ἔνδυνε π. στήθεσσι χιτῶνα Il.10.21

    ;

    χιτῶνα π. χροῒ δῦνεν Od.15.60

    ;

    δύσετο τεύχεα καλὰ π. χροΐ Il.13.241

    ;

    ἕσσαντο π. χροῒ χαλκόν Od.24.467

    ;

    κνημῖδας.. π. κνήμῃσιν ἔθηκε Il.11.17

    ;

    βεβλήκει τελαμῶνα π. στήθεσσι 12.401

    : in Prose,

    π. τῇσι κεφαλῇσι εἶχον τιάρας Hdt.7.61

    ;

    θώρακα π. τοῖς στέρνοις ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.2.13

    ; οἱ στρεπτοὶ οἱ π. τῇ δέρῃ καὶ τὰ ψέλια π. ταῖς χερσί ib.1.3.2. ;

    π. τῇ χειρὶ δακτύλιον ὄντα Pl.R. 359e

    , etc.;

    χαλκὸς ἔλαμπε π. στήθεσσι Il.13.245

    ;

    χιτῶνα π. στήθεσσι δαΐξαι 2.416

    ;

    πήληξ.. κονάβησε π. κροτάφοισι 15.648

    ; in other relations, π. δ' ἔγχεϊ χεῖρα καμεῖται will grow weary by grasping the spear, 2.389 ;

    δράκων ἑλισσόμενος π. χειῇ 22.95

    ;

    κνίση ἑλισσομένη π. καπνῷ 1.317

    ;

    π. σταχύεσσιν ἐέρση 23.598

    ;

    μάρναντο π. Σκαιῇσι πύλῃσιν 18.453

    : rarely in Trag.,

    π. βρέτει πλεχθείς A.Eu. 259

    (lyr.);

    κεῖται νεκρὸς π. νεκρῷ S.Ant. 1240

    .
    2 in Poets, also, around a weapon, i. e. spitted upon it, transfixed by it,

    π. δουρὶ πεπαρμένη Il.21.577

    ;

    ἐρεικόμενος π. δουρί 13.441

    ;

    κυλινδόμενος π. χαλκῷ 8.86

    ;

    π. δουρὶ ἤσπαιρε 13.570

    ;

    πεπτῶτα π. ξίφει S.Aj. 828

    ;

    αἷμα ἐρωήσει π. δουρί Il.1.303

    .
    3 of a warrior standing over a dead comrade so as to defend him,

    ἀμφὶ δ' ἄρ' αὐτῷ βαῖν', ὥς τις π. πόρτακι μήτηρ 17.4

    ; ἑστήκει, ὥς τίς τε λέων π. οἷσι τέκεσσι ib. 133 ; Αἴας π. Πατρόκλῳ.. βεβήκει ib. 137, cf. 355 ;

    π. σκύμνοισι βεβηκώς Ar.Eq. 1039

    .
    II of an object for or about which one struggles (cf. supr. A. 11.1),

    π. οἷσι μαχειόμενος κτεάτεσσι Od.17.471

    ;

    μαχήσασθαι π. δαιτί 2.245

    ;

    π. παιδὶ μάχης πόνος Il.16.568

    ;

    ἄνδρα π. ᾗ πατρίδι μαρνάμενον Tyrt.10.2

    ;

    π. τοῖς φιλτάτοις κυβεύειν Pl.Prt. 314a

    ;

    π. τῇ Σικελίᾳ ἔσται ὁ ἀγών Th.6.34

    codd.;

    κινδυνεύειν π. αὑτῷ Antipho 5.6

    .
    2 with Verbs denoting care, anxiety, or the opposite (cf. supr. A. 11.2),

    π. γὰρ δίε ποιμένι λαῶν, μή τι πάθοι Il.5.566

    ;

    ἔδεισεν δὲ π. ξανθῷ Μενελάῳ 10.240

    , cf. 11.557;

    δεδιότες π. τῷ χωρίῳ Th.1.60

    , cf. 74, 119, Ar.Eq.27;

    θαρρεῖν π. τῇ ἑαυτοῦ ψυχῇ Pl.Phd. 114d

    , cf. Tht. 148c;

    π. πλέγματι γαθεῖ Theoc.1.54

    .
    3 generally, of the cause or occasion, on account of, by reason of, ἀτύζεσθαι π. καπνῷ, v.l. for ὑπὸ καπνοῦ in Il.8.183;

    μὴ π. Μαρδονίῳ πταίσῃ ἡ Ἑλλάς Hdt.9.101

    ;

    π. σφίσιν αὐτοῖς πταῖσαι Th.6.33

    ;

    π. αὑτῷ σφαλῆναι Id.1.69

    : in Poets, π. δείματι for fear, Pi.P.5.58 ; π. τιμᾷ in honour or praise, ib.2.59; π. τάρβει, π. φόβῳ, A.Pers. 696 (lyr.), Ch.35(lyr.);

    π. χάρματι h.Cer. 429

    :—but π. θυμῷ is f.l. in Hdt.3.50.
    C WITH ACCUSATIVE,
    I of Place, prop. of the object round about which motion takes place, π. βόθρον ἐφοίτων came flocking round the pit, Od.11.42 ;

    π. νεκρὸν ἤλασαν ἵππους Il.23.13

    ;

    π. τέρματα ἵπποι τρωχῶσι 22.162

    ; ἄστυ πέρι.. διώκειν ib. 173, 230 ;

    ἐρύσας π. σῆμα 24.16

    , cf. 51, etc.;

    π. φρένας ἤλυθ' ἰωή 10.139

    ;

    π. φρένας ἤλυθε οἶνος Od.9.362

    : also of extension round, ἑστάμεναι π. τοῖχον, π. βωμόν, Il.18.374, Od.13.187, etc.;

    λέξασθαι π. ἄστυ Il.8.519

    ;

    μάρνασθαι π. ἄ. 6.256

    , etc.;

    φυλάσσοντας π. μῆλα 12.303

    ; οἳ π. Πηνειὸν.. ναίεσκον, π. Δωδώνην.. οἰκί' ἔθεντο, 2.757, 750;

    σειρήν κεν π. ῥίον Οὐλύμποιο δησαίμην 8.25

    , cf. Od.18.67: in Prose,

    ἰκριῶσαι π. τὼ ἀγάλματε IG12.371.22

    ;

    φυλακὰς δεῖ π. τὸ στρατόπεδον εἶναι X.An. 5.1.9

    ; π. τὴν κρήνην εὕδειν somewhere near it, Pl.Phdr. 259a, cf. X.Cyr. 1.2.9;

    εἶναι π. τὸν λαγώ Id.Cyn.4.4

    ; π. λίθον πεσών upon it, Ar.Ach. 1180; π. αὑτὰ καταρρεῖν collapse upon themselves, D.2.10;

    ταραχθεῖσαι [αἱ νῆες] π. ἀλλήλας Th.7.23

    ; πλεῦνες π. ἕνα many to one, Hdt.7.103 ; π. τὸν ἄρξαντα.. τὸ ἀδίκημά ἐστι is imputable to him who.., Antipho 4.4.2 : freq. with a Subst. only, ἡ π. Λέσβον ναυμαχία the sea-fight off Lesbos, X.HG2.3.32 ;

    οἱ π. τὴν Ἔφεσον Pl.Tht. 179e

    ;

    στρατηγοὶ π. Πελοπόννησον IG12.324.18

    : strengthd.,

    π. τ' ἀμφί τε τάφρον Il.17.760

    ;

    π. τ' ἀμφί τε κύματα Hes.Th. 848

    ; cf. ἀμφί c. 1.2.
    2 of persons who are about one,

    ἔχειν τινὰ π. αὑτόν X.HG5.3.22

    ; esp. οἱ π. τινά a person's attendants, connexions, associates, or colleagues,

    οἱ π. τὸν Πείσανδρον πρέσβεις Th.8.63

    ; οἱ π. Ἡράκλειτον his school, Pl.Cra. 440c, cf. X.An.1.5.8, etc.; οἱ π. Ἀρχίαν πολέμαρχοι Archias and his colleagues, Id.HG5.4.2, cf. An.2.4.2, etc.; οἱ π. τινά so-and-so and his family, PGrenf.1.21.16 (ii B.C.), etc.; later οἱ π. τινά, periphr. for the person himself, οἱ π. Φαβρίκιον Fabricius, Plu.Pyrrh.20, cf. Tim.13, IGRom.3.883.14 (Tarsus, ii/iii A.D.); cf. ἀμφί C. 1.3.
    3 of the object about which one is occupied or concerned, π. δόρπα πονεῖσθαι, π. δεῖπνον πένεσθαι, Il.24.444, Od.4.624 (but π. τεύχε' ἕπουσι, tmesis for περιέπουσι, Il.15.555); later mostly εἶναι π. τι, Th.7.31, X.HG2.2.4;

    γενέσθαι Isoc.3.12

    ; π. γυναῖκας γενέσθαι Vett. Val.17.20;

    ὄντων ἡμῶν π. ταύτην τὴν πραγματείαν D.48.6

    ;

    διατρῖψαι π. τὴν θήραν X.Cyr.1.2.11

    , etc.: less freq.

    ἔχειν π. τινάς Id.HG7.4.28

    , Gal.15.442; in periphr. phrases, οἱ π. τὴν ποίησιν καὶ τοὺς λόγους ὄντες poets and orators, Isoc.12.35 ;

    οἱ π. τὴν φιλοσοφίαν ὄντες Id.9.8

    ; οἱ π. τὴν μουσικήν ib.4 ; οἱ π. τὰς τελετάς ministers of the mysteries, Pl.Phd. 69c ; ὁ π. τὸν ἵππον the groom, X. Eq.6.3; cf. ἀμφί C. 1.6.
    4 round or about a place, and so in,

    π. νῆσον ἀλώμενοι Od.4.368

    , cf. 90;

    ἐμέμηκον π. σηκούς 9.439

    ; ἃν π. ψυχὰν γάθησεν in his heart, Pi.P.4.122 ;

    χρονίζειν π. Αἴγυπτον Hdt.3.61

    , cf. 7.131;

    εὕροι ἄν τις [βασιλείας] π. τοὺς βαρβάρους Pl.R. 544d

    , etc.; οἱ

    π. Φωκίδα τόποι Plb.5.24.12

    , etc.
    5 about, in the case of, τὰ π. τὴν Αἴγυπτον γεγονότα, τὰ π. Μίλητον γενόμενα, Hdt.3.13, 6.26 ;

    εὐσεβεῖν π. θεούς Pl.Smp. 193a

    ;

    ἀσεβεῖν π. ξένους X.Cyr.5.2.10

    ;

    ἁμαρτάνειν π. τινάς Id.An.3.2.20

    ;

    ἀνήρ ἐστιν ἀγαθὸς π. τὸν δῆμον τὸν Ἀθηναίων IG12.59.10

    ;

    ἄνδρ' ἀγαθὸν ὄντα Μαραθῶνι π. τὴν πόλιν Ar.Ach. 696

    ;

    τοιαύτην γνώμην ἔχειν π. τὸν πατέρα Lys.10.21

    ;

    οὐδεμία συμφορὴ.. ἔσται.. π. οἶκον τὸν σόν Hdt.8.102

    ; ποιέειν or πράττειν τι π. τινά, Id.1.158, Pl.Grg. 507a;

    τὰ π. Πρηξάσπεα πρηχθέντα Hdt.3.76

    ;

    καινοτομεῖν π. τὰ θεῖα Pl. Euthphr.3b

    ;

    π. θεοὺς μὴ σωφρονεῖν X.Mem.1.1.20

    ; σπουδάζειν π. τινά promote his cause, Isoc.1.10: without a Verb,

    αἱ π. τοὺς παῖδας συμφοραί X.Cyr.7.2.20

    ;

    ἡ π. αὑτὸν ἐπιμέλεια Isoc.9.2

    ;

    ἡ π. ἡμᾶς ἡνιόχησις Pl.Phdr. 246b

    : generally, of all relations, about, concerning, in respect of,

    π. μὲν τοὺς ἰχθύας οὕτως ἔχει Hdt.2.93

    , cf. 8.86;

    πονηρὸν π. τὸ σῶμα Pl.Prt. 313d

    ;

    ἀκόλαστος π. ταῦτα Aeschin.1.42

    ; γελοῖος π. τὰς διατριβάς ib.126 ;

    ξυνηνέχθη θόρυβος π. τὸν Ἀστύοχον Th.8.84

    ; as to (cf. A. 11.5),

    π. τὸ παρὸν πάθος Pl.Tht. 179c

    , cf. Phd. 65a : freq. in place of an Adj., ὄργανα ὅσα π. γεωργίαν, i.e. γεωργικά, Id.R. 370d ;

    οἱ νόμοι οἱ π. τοὺς γάμους Id.Cri. 50d

    ;

    αἱ π. τὰ μαθήματα ἡδοναί Id.Phlb. 51e

    ; also in place of a gen., οἱ π. Αυσίαν λόγοι the speeches of L., Id.Phdr. 279a; ἡ π. Φίλιππον τυραννίς the despotism of P., X.HG5.4.2 ;

    ἀκρασίας τῆς π. τὸν θυμόν Arist.EN 1149b19

    : in Prose, to denote circumstances connected with any person or thing, τὰ π. Κῦρον, τὰ π. Ἑλένην, τὰ π. Βάττον, Hdt.1.95, 2.113, 4.154 ; τὰ π. τὸν Ἄθων the works at Mount Athos, Id.7.37; τὰ π. τὰς ναῦς naval affairs, Th.1.13; τὰ π. τὴν ναυμαχίαν (v.l. for τῆς ναυμαχίας ) the events of.., Id.8.63;

    τὰ π. τὸν πόλεμον Pl.R. 468a

    ;

    τὰ π. τὸ σῶμα Id.Phdr. 246d

    ;

    τὰ π. τοὺς θεούς X.Cyr.8.1.23

    , etc.; cf. ἀμφί c.1.4.
    II of Time, π. λύχνων ἁφάς about the time of lamp-lighting, Hdt.7.215; π. μέσας νύκτας about midnight, X.An.1.7.1; π. πλήθουσαν ἀγοράν ib.2.1.7; π. ἡλίου δυσμάς ib.6.5.32 ;

    π. τούτους τοὺς χρόνους Th.3.89

    , etc.
    2 of round numbers, π. ἑβδομήκοντα about seventy, Id.1.54;

    π. ἑπτακοσίους X.HG2.4.5

    , etc.
    D Position: π. may follow its Subst., when it suffers anastrophe,

    ἄστυ πέρι Il.22.173

    ;

    ἔριδος πέρι 16.476

    : most freq. with gen.,

    τοῦδε πράγματος πέρι A.Eu. 630

    ;

    τῶνδε βουλεύειν πέρι Id.Th. 248

    , etc. (S. only once uses it before its gen., Aj. 150 (anap.)): in Prose,

    σφέων αὐτῶν πέρι Hdt.8.36

    ;

    σοφίας πέρι Pl.Phlb. 49a

    ;

    δικαίων τε πέρι καὶ ἀδίκων Id.Grg. 455a

    , etc.;

    γραμμάτων εἴπομεν ὡς οὐχ ἱκανῶς ἔχεις πέρι Id.Lg. 809e

    , cf. Ap. 19c.
    E περί abs., as ADV., around, about, also, near, by, freq. in Hom.,

    γέλασσε δὲ πᾶσα π. χθών Il.19.362

    , al.: strengthd.,

    περί τ' ἀμφί τε κάλλος ἄητο

    round about,

    h.Cer.276

    , cf. Call.Hec.1.1.13.
    2 π. does not suffer anastrophe in the [dialect] Ep. phrase π. κῆρι right heartily,

    π. κῆρι φίλησε Il.13.430

    , etc. ( κῆρι φιλεῖν alone, 9.117);

    ἀπέχθωνται π. κῆρι 4.53

    ; π. κῆρι τιέσκετο ib.46, cf. Od.5.36, 7.69;

    π. κῆρι.. ἐχολώθη Il.13.206

    ; also

    π. φρεσὶν ἄσπετος ἀλκή 16.157

    ;

    π. φρεσὶν αἴσιμα ᾔδη Od.14.433

    ;

    ἀλύσσοντες π. θυμῷ Il.22.70

    , cf. Od.14.146;

    π. σθένεϊ Il.17.22

    .
    4 περὶ κάτω bottom upwards,

    δῖνος π. κάτω τετραμμένος Stratt.34

    , cf. Phot.;

    τὴν κόγχην στρέψας π. τὰ κάτω Ael.NA9.34

    .
    F IN COMPOS. all its chief senses recur, esp.
    I extension in all directions as from a centre, all round, as in περιβάλλω, περιβλέπω, περιέχω.
    II completion of an orbit and return to the same point, about, as in περιάγω, περιβαίνω, περίειμι ( εἶμι ibo), περιέρχομαι, περιστρέφω.
    III a going over or beyond, above, before, as in περιβαίνω III, περιβάλλω v, περιγίγνομαι, περιεργάζομαι, περιτοξεύω.
    IV generally, a strengthening of the simple notion, beyond measure, very, exceedingly, as in περικαλλής, περίκηλος, περιδείδω, like Lat. per-.
    V the notion of double-ness which belongs to ἀμφί is found in only one poetic compd., περιδέξιος (q.v.).
    G PROSODY: περί never suffers elision in Il. or Od. (

    περ' ἰγνύσι h.Merc. 152

    ); once in Hes.,

    περίαχε Th. 678

    (cf. Q.S.3.601, 11.382), v. ἰάχω fin.;

    περ' ἰγνύῃσι Theoc.25.242

    ;

    περ' Ἠδάλιον Inscr.Cypr. 135.27

    H.; also in Pi.,

    περάπτων P.3.52

    ;

    περόδοις N.11.40

    ;

    περιδαῖος Fr. 154

    ;

    περ' αὐτᾶς P.4.265

    ;

    ταύτας περ' ἀτλάτου πάθας O.6.38

    : not in Trag. (περεβάλοντο, περεσκήνωσεν are ff. ll. in A.Ag. 1147, Eu. 634); in Com. and codd. of Prose writers only in part. of περίειμι ( εἶμι ibo) (q. v.):—π. stands before a word beginning with a vowel in Com., περὶ Ἀθηνῶν, περὶ ἐμοῦ, Ar.Eq. 1005 sq.:—[dialect] Aeol. περρ metri gr., v. A. 5.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > περί

  • 15 συνίστημι

    συνίστημι, also [full] συνιστάνω (Plb.4.82.5, J.
    A BJ Prooem.5, Sor.1.126 ([voice] Pass.)); [full] συνιστάω (Arist.GA 777a6, Pr. 928a9, Conon 48, 2 Ep.Cor. 6.4; [tense] impf.

    συνίστα Plb.3.43.11

    , dub. in D.H.8.18): [tense] impf. συνίστην, [tense] fut. συστήσω, [tense] aor. 1 συνέστησα: trans. [tense] pf. συνέστᾰκα, found only in later texts, PSI9.1035.14 (ii A.D.), S.E.M.7.109, AP11.139 (Lucill.), Iamb.VP35.261:—set together, combine,

    τὰς χορδὰς ἀλλήλαις Pl.R. 412a

    ; τὰς ἄρκυς καὶ τὰ δίκτυα f.l. in X.Cyn.6.12.
    II combine, associate, unite,

    σ. τοὺς Ἀρκάδας ἐπὶ τῇ Σπάρτῃ Hdt.6.74

    , cf. 3.84;

    Πελοποννήσου τὰ δυνατώτατα Th.6.16

    ; ταύτας (sc. τὰς πόλεις) Isoc. 5.30;

    πόλεις πρὸς ἀλλήλας X.HG3.5.2

    ;

    τοὺς ἐπιτηδείους ἐς ξυνωμοσίαν Th.8.48

    ;

    τὰ πάντα ἀριθμοῖς S.E.M.7.109

    .
    b σ. Ἀσίην ἑωυτῷ unite Asia in dependence on himself, Hdt.1.103; μαντικὴν ἑωυτῷ συστῆσαι bring prophetic art into union with himself, i.e. win, acquire it, Id.2.49;

    σ. τινὰ ἀντίπαλον ἑαυτῷ X.Cyr.6.1.26

    ;

    σ. τισὶν ἡγεμόνα Plb.2.24.6

    , cf. 3.42.6, 15.5.5.
    2 contrive,

    σ. θάνατον ἐπί τινι Hdt.3.71

    ;

    ἐφ' ἡμᾶς πόλεμον D.15.3

    ;

    ἐπίθεσιν ἐπὶ τοὺς Σπαρτιάτας Arist.Pol. 1306b35

    ; σ. τιμάς settle prices, D.56.7.
    3 [voice] Med. in these senses,

    τὸ ὅλον συνίστασθαι Pl.Phdr. 269c

    ;

    τὸ δεῖπνον Diph.43.5

    : mostly [tense] aor. 1,

    μὴ ἐκ χρηστῶν καὶ κακῶν ἀνθρώπων συστήσηται πόλιν Pl.Plt. 308d

    ;

    οὐρανόν Id.Ti. 32b

    ; πᾶν τόδε ib. 69c, cf. R. 530a;

    πόλεμον Isoc. 10.49

    , Plb.2.1.1;

    σ. μοι μάχην PTeb.44.14

    (ii B.C.);

    πολιορκίαν Plb. 1.30.5

    ;

    κίνδυνον Id.3.106.4

    ;

    παρατάξεις D.S.1.18

    ;

    ἀντιλογίαν πρός με PGrenf.1.38.8

    (ii/i B.C.), cf. PSI3.167.14 (ii B.C.), Mitteis Chr. 31 iv 21 (ii B.C.);

    ἀηδίαν PLond.2.342.6

    (ii A.D.), BGU22.15 (ii A.D.); οὐδένα λόγον συνισταμένη πρὸς ἡμᾶς rendering no account to us. PAmh.2.31.17 (ii B.C.), cf. PRein.18.33 (ii B.C.);

    σ. ἀγῶνας Plu.Fab.19

    ;

    ἑορτήν Apollod.3.14.6

    ; ναυτικὰς δυνάμεις, μισθοφόρους, Plb.1.25.5, 4.60.5; also, arrange in order of battle, rally, Id.3.43.11, dub. in D.H. 8.18.
    4 Math., erect two straight lines from points on a given straight line so as to meet and form a triangle, in [voice] Pass., Arist.Mete. 376a2, b2, cf. Euc.1.7, Papp.106.12; of two arcs of great circles on a sphere, Id.476.19,22.
    5 of an author, compose, μύθους, τὴν Ὀδύσσειαν, etc., Arist.Po. 1455a22, 1451a29, etc.
    IV bring together as friends, introduce or recommend one to another,

    τινάς τινι Pl.La. 200d

    , cf. X.Smp.4.63; ἵνα τῳ τῶν.. σοφιστῶν.. συστήσω τουτονί, as a pupil, Pl.Thg. 122a;

    τινὰ ἰατρῷ σ. περὶ τῆς ἀσθενείας Id.Chrm. 155b

    ;

    σύστησον αὐτοὺς.. ὅπως πλέωσι PCair.Zen.2.2

    (iii B.C.), cf. 195.6 (iii B.C.), PMich.Zen.6.2,3 (iii B.C., [voice] Act. and [voice] Pass.):—[voice] Pass.,

    συνεστάθη Κύρῳ X.An.3.1.8

    ; Κύρῳ συσταθησόμενος ib.6.1.23, cf. PCair.Zen.447.1,11 (iii B.C.), Phld.Acad.Ind. p.49 M.; ἔχειν τινὰ συνεσταμένον, συνιστάμενον, regard him as introduced or recommended, POxy.787 (i A.D.), PHolm.p.42.
    b recommend, secure approval of a course of action, SIG679.90 (Magn. Mae., ii B.C.):— [voice] Med., recommend persons for appointment, PLond.3.1249.7 (iv A.D.).
    e appoint to a charge, LXXNu.27.23; appoint a representative,

    σ. ἀντ' ἐμαυτῆς τὸν ἕτερον ἐμοῦ ἀδελφόν PTeb.317.10

    (ii A.D.);

    συνέστησά σε φροντιοῦντά μου τῶν ὑπαρχόντων BGU300.3

    , cf. 20 (ii A.D.):—[voice] Pass., Sammelb.4512.39 (ii B.C.);

    ἐπίτροπος συσταθείς CPHerm.55.5

    (iii A.D.);

    συσταθεὶς συνήγορος Plu.2.840e

    .
    V make solid or firm, brace up,

    τὸ σῶμα Hp.Aph.3.17

    , cf. Thphr.CP1.8.3; σ. [τὰ ἴχνη] sets them, X.Cyn.5.3; ὑπὲρ τοῦ συνεστῶτος [τοῦ τείχους], i.e. the unbroken part, Jul.Or.2.64c; contract, condense, opp. διακρίνω or διαλύω, Arist.GC 336a4, Cael. 280a12; of liquids, make them congeal, curdle,

    γάλα Poll.1.251

    ;

    φλέγμα Hp.Vict.2.54

    (v.l.): metaph., συστήσας τὸ πρόσωπον with a frown, Plu.2.152b.
    VI exhibit, give proof of,

    εὔνοιαν Plb.4.5.6

    ;

    σ. ὅτι.. Id.3.108.4

    : c. acc. et inf., D.S.14.45: c. part.,

    σ. τινὰς ὄντας Id.13.91

    .
    2 prove, establish, Phld.Sign.4, Rh.1.112S.
    B [voice] Pass., with [tense] aor. 2 [voice] Act. συνέστην: [tense] pf. συνέστηκα, part. συνεστηκώς, [var] contr. συνεστώς, ῶσα, ώς or ός (Pl.Ti. 56b), [dialect] Ion. συνεστεώς, εῶσα (neut. not found), Hdt.1.74, 6.108: [tense] fut.

    συσταθήσομαι X.An.6.1.23

    , Arist.Mete. 376a2; [tense] fut.[voice] Med.

    ξυστήσομαι A.Th. 435

    , 509, 672, Pl.Ti. 54c: [tense] aor. [voice] Pass. συνεστάθην [ᾰ] X.An.3.1.8, al., PCair.Zen.447.1,11 (iii B.C.), PTeb.27.35 (ii B.C.), etc.:— stand together, περὶ τὸν τρίποδα (of statues) Hdt.8.27; opp. διίστασθαι, X.Cyn.6.16; of soldiers, form in order of battle, Id.An.5.7.16, 6.5.28, al.; συστάντες ἁθρόοι ib.7.3.47.
    3 to be involved or implicated in a thing, λιμῷ, πόνῳ, λιμῷ καὶ καμάτῳ, Hdt.7.170, 8.74, 9.89;

    ἀλγηδόνος ᾇ ξυνέστας S.OC 514

    (lyr.);

    συνεστῶτες ἀγῶνι ναυτικῷ Th.4.55

    ; καρτερᾷ μάχῃ ib.96.
    III of friends, form a league or union, band together, Id.6.21,33, etc.; κατὰ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς ξ. Id.2.88;

    ἀλλήλοις X.HG2.1.1

    ; ξυνίστασθαι πρὸς ἑκατέρους league themselves with one side or the other, Th.1.1, cf. 15;

    μετά τινος D.34.34

    , etc.; ἐπί τινας against them, Lys.22.17, cf. 30.10 (abs.); καί μ' οὐ λέληθεν οὐδὲν ἐν τῇ πόλει ξυνιστάμενον no conspiracy, Ar.Eq. 863, cf. X.Cyr.1.1.2; οἱ συνιστάμενοι the conspirators, Ar.Lys. 577 (anap.);

    τὸ ξυνεστηκός Th.8.66

    .
    2 generally, to be connected or allied, as by marriage, c. acc. cogn.,

    λέχος Ἡρακλεῖ ξυστᾶσα S.Tr.28

    : in magic,

    συνιστάνου.. τοῖς.. θεοῖς

    put yourself into connexion with.., PMag. Leid.W.

    1.29

    ;

    συσταθεὶς πρὸ<ς> τὸν ἥλιον PMag.Par.1.168

    : in law,

    Αὐρηλία Βησοῦς μετὰ συνεστῶτος Αὐρηλίου Θέωνος A.

    B. acting with A. T., POxy.912.4 (iii A.D.), cf. Sammelb.7338.5 (iii/iv A.D.).
    IV to come or be put together, of parts,

    συνιστάμεν' ἄλλοθεν ἄλλα Emp. 35.6

    , cf. E.Fr.910.6 (anap.), Pl.R. 530a;

    ἐπειδὴ πάντα συνειστήκει X.Cyr.6.1.54

    ;

    σ. ἐξ ὀλιγίστων μερῶν Pl.Ti. 56b

    , cf. 54c; ἡ πόλις ἐξ οἰκιῶν ς. X.Mem.3.6.14; ἐξ ὧν ὁ κόσμος ς. Arist.EN 1141b2; esp. in military sense, ξυνεστὼς στρατός an organized army, E.IA 87; ἱππικὸν συνεστηκός an organized force of cavalry, X.An.7.6.26; τὸ συνεστηκὸς στράτευμα the organized force, D.8.17,46.
    c arise, take shape or body,

    τὸ συνιστάμενον κακόν D.18.62

    , cf. 6.35;

    πόλις οὕτω συστᾶσα Pl.R. 546a

    ; ἐνταῦθα συνίστανται [ψύλλαι] Arist. HA 556b26, cf. Thphr.CP4.4.10, Sor.2.37, al., Gal.Vict.Att.9; σ. ἀπό τινος arise from.., Phld.Ir.p.76W.
    d in [tense] aor. 2 and [tense] pf., come into existence, exist,

    μεγάλη συνέστη δύναμις βασιλέων Pl.Ti. 25a

    ;

    συμμαχία ἡ περὶ Κόρινθον συστᾶσα Isoc.4.142

    ;

    τοῦ καιροῦ τῆς τῶν γενημάτων συναγωγῆς συνεστηκότος PSI3.173.12

    (ii B.C.);

    κεχωρίσθαι ἀπ' ἀλλήλων τῆς συστάσης αὐτοῖς συμβιώσεως BGU1102.9

    (i B.C.);

    οἰκία.. σὺν τοῖς συνεστῶσι μέτροις καὶ πηχισμοῖς καὶ συνεστῶσι θεμελίοις Sammelb.5247.6

    ,11 (i A.D.).
    V to be compact, solid, firm,

    οὔτε σκιδνάμενον οὔτε συνιστάμενον Parm.2.4

    ; συνεστῶτα σώματα, of animals in good condition, X.Cyn.7.8, cf. Pl.Ti. 83a; acquire substance or consistency, of eggs, Arist.HA 567a28; of blood, honey, milk, ib. 516a5, 554a6, Hp.Vict.2.51; of the embryo,

    συνίσταται καὶ λαμβάνει τὴν οἰκείαν μορφήν Arist.GA 733b20

    ; of the brain, ib. 744a22; of the bowels, Hp.Epid.3.17.ά, Coac. 589; ῥεῦμα συνεστηκός concentrated, Id.Medic.7; συνεστηκυῖα χιών congealed, frozen, Plb.3.55.2.
    VII συνέστηκε c. acc. et inf., it is well known that.., = Lat. constat, Marcian.Peripl.1 Prooem.
    VIII to be weighed together,

    συνεστάθη Inscr.Délos 1423

    Aai17, 1429Bi3 (ii B.C.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > συνίστημι

  • 16 γαιήοχος

    Grammatical information: m.
    Meaning: Epithet of Poseidon, sec. of Zeus etc. (Il.), meaning uncertain, mostly taken as `earthshaker' (= ἐννοσίγαιος, s. v.)
    Other forms: Dor. γαιαοχος, Lac. γαιάϜοχος
    Origin: XX [etym. unknown]
    Etymology: Not with Borgeaud KZ 68, 221f. = `bringing home i. e. husband of Gaia' = Ποσειδῶν (s. v.). Kretschmer Glotta 5, 303 connected Poseidon ἵππιος who as a stallion united with Demeter, taking Γαῖαν ὀχεύων or Γαίᾳ ὀχούμενος in erotic sense, but there is no reason why ὀχέω, ὀχεύων in this sense would have a F. Nilsson Gr. Rel. 1, 419 understood (as alternative, after Hesychius): `faring below the earth' (Poseidon as a river); improbable ( ὁ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ὀχοῦμενος!). Mostly one follows Meillet (Mél. Ch. Adler, 249-255) and connects Goth. gawigan `set in motion'. - Cf. αἰγίοχος (s. αἰγίς).
    Page in Frisk: 1,282

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > γαιήοχος

  • 17 ὀσφραίνομαι

    Grammatical information: v.
    Meaning: `to smell, to sniff'; rare a. late caus. ὀσφραίνω, also w. ἀπ-, συν-, παρ- a.o., `to give to smell, to make smell' (Gal., Gp.).
    Other forms: Aor. ὀσφρ-έσθαι (Att.; ὤσφραντο Hdt. 1, 80), fut. ὀσφρ-ήσομαι (Att.), also ὀσφρανθῆναι (Hp., Arist.), - θήσομαι (LXX), younger pres. ὀσφρ-ᾶται (Paus., Luc.), aor. ὠσφρ-ήσαντο, - ήθη (Arat., Ael.).
    Compounds: Rarely w. περι-, ὑπ-, κατ-. Comp. καπν-οσφράν-της m. "smoke smeller" (Com. Adesp., Alciphr.).
    Derivatives: 1. ὄσφρ-ησις f. `olfactory sense, olf. organ' (Pl., Arist.), 2. - ασία f. `smell, the smelling' (LXX, Arr.), 3. - ανσις f. `olfactory sense' (Clearch.). 4. backformation ὄσφραι f. pl. `flavours, smell' (Ach. Tat.) with ὀσφράδιον n. `bunch of flowers' (Eust.). 5. ὀσφρ-αντήριος `smelling, sniffing' (Ar.), 6. - αντικός `smelling, able to smell (Arist.), - ητικός `id.' (Gal., D. L.); 7. - αντός (Arist.). - ητός (S. E., Gal.) `smellable'.
    Origin: IE [Indo-European] [772] * h₃ed- `smell' + ?
    Etymology: The complex is clearly built after comparable fomations, but the attestations do not allow certains conclusions on their relative chronology. With ὀσφρέσθαι: ὀσφρήσομαι: ὀσφρητός agree the semantically related, much more frequent αἰσθέσθαι: αἰσθήσομαι: αἰσθητός. ὀσφραίνομαι may have followed it after formal examples like ἀλιτέσθαι: ἀλιταίνομαι, βήσομαι: βαίνω, πεφήσεται: φαίνω etc.; further ὀσφρανθῆναι after εὑφρανθῆναι; ὤσφραντο (Hdt.) prob. after ἠνείκαντο a.o. (cf. Wackernagel Verrn. Beitr. 48 = Kl. Schr. 1, 809). So there is no ground to consider the diff. forms as inherited (thus e.g. Fraenkel Nom. ag. 2, 82f.). -- That the initial syllable is connected with ὄζω, ὀδμή, ὀσμή, is since long accepted (s. Curtius 244 w. lit.); since Wackernagel KZ 33, 43 (Kl. Schr. 1, 722) one supposes in it a zero grade σ-stem *ὀδσ- (cf. - ώδης a.o. s. ὄζω). Against W.s further identification of ὀσ-φραίνομιαι with ἀ-, εὑ-φραίνω (to φρήν) speak esp. the non-present forms ὀσ-φρέσθαι, - φρήσασθαι, with which ἀ-, εὑ-φραίνω give nothing comparable. Instead Brugmann (e.g. IF 6, 100ff.) a.o. try to connect Skt. jí-ghr-ati, ghrā-ti `smell', ghrāṇa-m n. `scent, nose' ( = Toch. A krāṃ `id.'; cf. Duchesne-Guillemin BSL 41, 154). The details remain meanwhile unclear; Schwyzer 644 n. 5 is inclined, with Brugmann4 302 n. 1 a.o. to start from a noun *ὄσ-φρ-ος `detect a smell'; against this with good arguments Debrunner IF 21, 42. -- Older lit. in Bq.
    Page in Frisk: 2,438-439

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > ὀσφραίνομαι

  • 18 ῥάκος

    Grammatical information: n.
    Meaning: `rag, schred, wrinkles, remnants' (Od.).
    Other forms: often pl. ῥάκεα, .
    Compounds: As 1. member in ῥακό-δυτος prop. `clothed in rags', `shabby' (E. in lyr.).
    Derivatives: 1. Dimin. ῥάκιον, pl. - ια n. (Ar. a.o.); 2. ῥακώματα pl. = ῥάκη (Ar.; enlarged, Chantraine Form. 187); 3. ἀπορ\<ρ\> ακίσματα H. to ῥάκη (: *ἀπο-ρρακίζειν); 3. adj. ῥάκ-ινος (hell. inscr.), - όεις (AP), - ώδης (D. C., AP) `tattered, wrinkled'; 4. Uncertain (spoiled Debrunner IF 23, 14) ῥακωλέον ῥάκος H. (: ῥωγαλέος a.o.); 5. Denom. vb. ῥακ-όομαι `to become ragged, wrinkled' (Hp., Plu.) with - ωσις f. `wrinkling, wrinkledness' (Sor.).
    Origin: XX [etym. unknown]
    Etymology: For ῥάκεα, stands Aeol. βράκ-εα (Sapph. 57), (Theoc. 28, 11), but in the sense of `(long) ladies' garments'; to this βράκος κάλαμος, ἱμάτιον πολυτελές H. Other formation: βράκαλον ῥόπαλον, βράκετον δρέπανον, κλαδευτήριον H.; cf. (without dissim.) ῥάκετρον `chopping-knife' (Poll.; v. l. ῥάχ- [after ῥάχις]) with - ετρίζω `split, cut through' (Pl. Com.). The deviating meaning `ladies' garments' creates doubt whether βράκεα, - ος in this sense belong here (s. Belardi Doxa 3, 199 f. with another, very doubtful etymology). The other words can be connected without difficulty with ῥάκος from Ϝράκος, with βράκαλον after ῥόπαλον, σκύταλον; βράκετ(ρ)ον seems to be a primary nom. instr., which like ῥάκος presupposes a primary verb, approx. aor. 2. *ῥακεῖν. -- No connection outside Greek. Old is the comparison with Skt. vrścáti `hew, fell (trees), split', with yūpa-vrask-á- `post-cutter' and the ptc. vr̥k-ṇá- `hewn, felled', which may stand for *vr̥ṣk-ṇá- and so makes a possible basis *ŭr̥k-nó- (= Gr. *Ϝρακ-) unnecessary. The from this reconstructed IE *u̯resk-, *u̯rosk- has a variant in the Slav. word for `rumple' (cf. ῥάκος, also `rumple'), e.g. Russ.-CSl. vraska from *u̯orsk-ā. Toch. A wraske `disease' is phonetically unclear and lies semant. far off. For IE *u̯resk-, u̯ersk- one could reconstruct an older *u̯reḱ-sk-, *u̯erḱ-sk-, through which the connections with u̯r̥ḱ- in ῥάκος would be established. An IE *u̯r̥ḱ- can however be found in the Indo-Iran. word for `tree' (prop. *'a felled tree'), Skt. vr̥kṣá-, Av. varǝša- m., IE *u̯r̥ḱ-s-o- beside *u̯r̥ḱ-os- in ῥάκος (s. Lidén in WP. 1, 286); then we have to abandon vr̥k-ṇá- \< IE *u̯rk-nó-. -- Cf. WP. l.c., Pok. 1163 (m. Lit.). Older lit. in Bq. -- Cf. ῥίνη, ῥινός.
    Page in Frisk: 2,640-641

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > ῥάκος

  • 19 κύριος

    1
    I. κύριος, ία, ιον(Pind. et al.; ins, pap) comp. κυριώτερος (Just., A II, 13, 3); superl. κυριώτατος (Just., D. 11, 2); adv. κυρίως. The primary mng. relates to possession of power or authority, in various senses: ‘strong, authoritative, valid, ruling’; then to that which is preeminently important principal, essential (Aeschyl. et al.; 4 Macc 1:19; Jos., Ant. 20, 41, C. Ap. 1, 19; 2, 177; Just.; Ath. 22:2) τὸ δὲ κυριώτερον but what is more important IMg 1:2 (cp. Diog. L. 4, 26 ἐν τῷ κυρίῳ=quite definitely).—DELG.
    2
    II. κύριος, ου, ὁ (the masc. form of the subst. adj. κύριος [s. I], Aeschyl.+; Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §385 [=ὁ τὸ κῦρος ἔχων]; ins, pap, LXX, pseudepigr.; Philo, Joseph., apolog.; loanw. in rabb. For the corresp. fem. s. κυρία.) gener. ‘lord, master’.
    one who is in charge by virtue of possession, owner (X., Symp. 6, 1; Diod S 4, 15, 3; 14, 7, 6; ins, pap, LXX) κ. πάντων Gal 4:1 (Diod S 33, 7, 1; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. 1, 13 p. 12, 10 of one who has come of age and controls his own property).
    of things w. impers. obj. κ. τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος owner of the vineyard (cp. SIG 742, 6 κ. τῆς χώρας) Mt 20:8; 21:40; Mk 12:9; Lk 20:13, 15; ὁ κ. τῆς οἰκίας the master of the house (Ex 22:7; SIG 1215, 28; PTebt 5, 147 [118 B.C.] τοὺς κ. τῶν οἰκιῶν) Mk 13:35. Of a πῶλος: οἱ κ. αὐτοῦ its owners (PHib 34, 3 a span of oxen; Ex 21:29 [αὐτοῦ=τοῦ ταύρου]) Lk 19:33 (ASouter, Exp. 8th ser., 8, 1914, 94f, in connection w. the pl. here and Ac 16:16, 19 thinks of the owners as man and wife; the pl. οἱ κύριοι has this mng. Diod S 34 + 35, Fgm. 2, 10 and 2, 37: a married couple who are slave-owners. On the other hand in the Syntipas collection of Aesop’s Fables 16 p. 534 P. οἱ κύριοι of a dog are a number of metalworkers. On Hebr. background for possible understanding of the pl. in the sing. sense ‘owner’, s. RButh, JBL 104, ’86, 680–85.). The mng. owner easily passes into that of lord, master, one who has full control of someth. (Diod S 5, 42, 5 θανάτου κύριοι=lords over [life and] death; 10, 17, 1 and 2 κ. τοῦ σώματος=master of one’s own body; Ptolem., Apotel. 3, 11, 10 ὁ κ. τῆς ζωῆς; PsSol 2:29 κ. γῆς καὶ θαλάσσης; Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 67; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 200) ὁ κ. τοῦ θερισμοῦ the Lord of the harvest (Jos., Ant.4, 227 κύριος ἔστω τὰ φυτὰ καρποῦσθαι) Mt 9:38; Lk 10:2. κ. τοῦ σαββάτου Lord of the Sabbath Mt 12:8; Mk 2:28; Lk 6:5.
    w. a personal obj.: opp. δοῦλος J 13:16; foll. by gen. of pers. (cp. Judg 19:11; Gen 24:36; TestSol 22:5; TestJob 7:9; TestGad 4:4; JosAs 4:14) Mt 10:24f; 18:31f; 24:48; Lk 12:36. ὁ κ. τοῦ δούλου Lk 12:46. Abs., though the sense is unmistakable (Diod S 8, 5, 3; ApcEsdr 3:14 p. 27, 27f Tdf.) 12:37, 42b; 14:23; J 15:15; cp. Ro 14:4a; Eph 6:9a; Col 4:1. Several masters of the same slave (Billerb. I 430.—TestJos 14:2): δυσὶν κυρίοις δουλεύειν Mt 6:24; Ac 16:16, 19 (s. Souter under a above). κατὰ σάρκα designates more definitely the sphere in which the service-relation holds true οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κ. Eph 6:5; Col 3:22. As a form of address used by slaves κύριε Mt 13:27; 25:20, 22, 24; Lk 13:8; 14:22; 19:16, 18, 20, 25.
    one who is in a position of authority, lord, master
    of earthly beings, as a designation of any pers. of high position: of husband in contrast to wife 1 Pt 3:6 (Gen 18:12; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 15 [Stone p. 38]; ApcMos 2. cp. Plut., De Virt. Mul. 15 p. 252b; SIG 1189, 7; 1190, 5; 1234, 1); of a father by his son Mt 21:29 (cp. BGU 423, 2 Ἀπίων Ἐπιμάχῳ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ κυρίῳ; 818, 1; 28; Gen 31:35; by his daughter TestJob 46:2; JosAs 4:5); of an official in high position, by those who have dealings with him (cp. PFay 106, 15; 129, 1; 134, 2; BGU 648, 16) Mt 27:63. As a form of address to respected pers. gener.; here, as elsewhere, = our sir (as Mod. Gk.) Mt 25:11; J 12:21; 20:15 (but s. NWyatt, ZNW 81, ’90, 38); Ac 16:30; Rv 7:14 (cp. Epict. 3, 23, 11; 19; Gen 23:6; 44:18; TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 33 [Stone p. 4]; JosAs 7:8 al.). The distinctive Gr-Rom. view of ‘deified’ rulers requires treatment under 2bβ.
    of transcendent beings
    α. as a designation of God (for this custom, which has its roots in the Orient, s. the references in Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Bousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 95–98; Dssm., LO 298f [LAE 353ff]; s. also SEG XXXVI, 350 and add. ins cited by DZeller, DDD 918f; LXX (where it freq. replaces the name Yahweh in the Mt); pseudepigr.; Philo, Just.; Hippol. Ref. 8, 17, 1; Orig., C. Cels. 1, 35, 6.—FDoppler, D. Wort ‘Herr’ als Göttername im Griech.: Opusc. philol. v. kath. akad. Philologenverein in Wien I 1926, 42–47; MParca, ASP 31, ’91, 51 [lit.]) ὁ κ. Mt 5:33; Mk 5:19; Lk 1:6, 9, 28, 46; 2:15, 22; Ac 4:26 (Ps 2:2); 7:33; 8:24; Eph 6:7 (perh. w. ref. to Christ); 2 Th 3:3; 2 Ti 1:16, 18; Hb 8:2; Js 1:7; 4:15. Without the art. (on the inclusion or omission of the art. s. BWeiss [θεός, beg.]; B-D-F §254, 1; Mlt-Turner 174), like a personal name (οὐδένα κύριον ὀνομνάζουσι πλὴν τὸν θεόν Hippol. Ref. 9, 26, 2) Mt 27:10; Mk 13:20; Lk 1:17, 58; Ac 7:49; Hb 7:21 (Ps 109:4); 12:6 (Pr 3:12); 2 Pt 2:9; Jd 5 (θεὸς Χριστός P72); 9. ἄγγελος κυρίου (LXX, TestSol, GrBar et al.) Mt 1:20, 24; 2:13, 19; 28:2; Lk 1:11; 2:9a; J 5:3 v.l.; Ac 5:19; 7:30 v.l.; 8:26; 12:7, 23. δόξα κυρίου (Is 40:5; PsSol 5:19; 7:31; TestLevi 8:11; ApcMos 37) Lk 2:9b; δούλη κ. 1:38; ἡμέρα κ. Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4); νόμος κ. Lk 2:23f, 39; τὸ ὄνομα κ. Mt 21:9 (Ps 117:26; PsSol 6:1 al.); Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); πνεῦμα κ. Lk 4:18 (Is 61:1); Ac 8:39; τὸ ῥῆμα κ. 1 Pt 1:25 (Gen 15:1 al.); φωνὴ κ. (Gen 3:8 al.); Ac 7:31; χεὶρ κ. (Ex 9:3 al.; TestJob 26:4; ApcMos prol.) Lk 1:66. ὁ Χριστὸς κυρίου 2:26 (PsSol 17:32 [Χριστὸς κύριος, s. app.]).—W. the sphere of his lordship more definitely expressed (Diod S 3, 61, 5 Zeus is κ. τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; 6 θεὸς καὶ κ. εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ σύμπαντος κόσμου; Jos., Ant. 20, 90 τῶν πάντων κ.; Just., D. 127, 2 κ. τῶν πάντων) κ. τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς (PGM 4, 640f; ParJer 5:32 [Harris]) Mt 11:25; Lk 10:21; cp. Ac 17:24. κ. τῶν κυριευόντων Lord of lords 1 Ti 6:15. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1:14; 2 Pt 3:15; Rv 11:15 (LXX; PsSol 10:5). Cp. 22:6 (s. Num 16:22; 27:16). κ. ὁ θεός Lk 1:32; Rv 1:8; with μου (σου, etc.) Mt 4:7 (Dt 6:16), 10 (Dt 6:13); 22:37 (Dt 6:5); Mk 12:29f (Dt 6:4f); Lk 1:16 al. κ. ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Ἰσραήλ 1:68 (PsSol 16:3; TestSol 1:13). κ. ὁ θεὸς (ἡμῶν) ὁ παντοκράτωρ God, the (our) Lord, the Almighty Rv 4:8; 15:3; 16:7; 19:6; 21:22 (TestSol D 4:7; cp. ParJer 9:6). κ. Σαβαώθ Ro 9:29 (Is 1:9; TestSol 1:6 al.; Just., D. 64, 2); Js 5:4.—W. prep. ἐνώπιον τοῦ κυρίου Lk 1:15 (Ex 23:17; 1 Km 1:25 al.; TestJob 15:6 al.; TestReub 1:9 al.). παρὰ κυρίου Mt 21:42; Mk 12:11 (both Ps 117:23). παρὰ κυρίῳ 2 Pt 3:8. πρὸς τὸν κύριον Hs 9, 12, 6 (LXX; PsSol 1:1 al.).
    β. Closely connected w. the custom of applying the term κ. to deities is that of honoring (deified) rulers with the same title (exx. [2bα beg.] in Ltzm., op. cit.; Bousset 93; Dssm., 299ff [LAE 356]; FKattenbusch, Das apostol. Symbol II 1900, 605ff; KPrümm, Herrscherkult u. NT: Biblica 9, 1928, 3–25; 119–40; 289–301; JFears, RAC XIV, 1047–93; JvanHenten, 1341–52 [lit.]; cp. the attitude of the Lacedaemonians: φοβούμενοι τὸν ἕνα κ. αὐτῶν τὸν Λυκούργου νόμον=‘respecting their one and only lord, the law of Lycurgus’ Orig., C. Cels. 8, 6, 12). Fr. the time of Claudius (POxy. 37, 6; O. Wilck II 1038, 6) we find the Rom. emperors so designated in increasing measure; in isolated cases, even earlier (OGI 606, 1; on Augustus’ attitude s. DioCass. 51, 7f). Ac 25:26.—On deified rulers in gener. s. LCerfaux-JTondriau, Un concurrent du Christianisme: le culte des souverains dans la civilisation gréco-romaine ’57; FTaeger, Charisma, 2 vols. ’57–60; DRoloff, Göttlichkeit, Vergöttlichung und Erhöhung zu seligem Leben, ’70. S. esp. the collection of articles and reviews by various scholars, in Römischer Kaiserkult, ed. AWlosok ’78.
    γ. κύριος is also used in ref. to Jesus:
    א. in OT quotations, where it is understood of the Lord of the new community ἡ ὁδὸς κ. (Is 40:3) Mt 3:3; Mk 1:3; Lk 3:4; J 1:23. εἶπεν κύριος τ. κυρίῳ μου (Ps 109:1: the first κ. is God, the second Christ; s. Billerb. IV 452–65: Der 110. Ps. in d. altrabb. Lit.; βασιλεὺς αὐτῶν χριστὸς κ. [or κυρίου; s. 2bα] PsSol 17:32) Mt 22:44 (cp. vss. 43, 45); Mk 12:36 (cp. vs. 37); Lk 20:42 (cp. vs. 44); Ac 2:34. ὁ καυχώμενος ἐν κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Cor 1:31 (cp. Jer 9:22f). τὸ ὄνομα κυρίου Ro 10:13 (cp. Jo 3:5). σὺ κατʼ ἀρχάς, κύριε, τὴν γῆν ἐθεμελίωσας Hb 1:10 (cp. Ps 101:26). εἰ ἐγεύσασθε ὅτι χρηστὸς ὁ κύριος 1 Pt 2:3 (cp. Ps 33:9). 1 Pt 3:15 adds Χριστόν to κύριον ἁγιάσατε Is 8:13.
    ב. Apart from OT quots., Mt and Mk speak of Jesus as κύριος only in one pass. (words of Jesus himself) Mk 11:3=Mt 21:3 (but s. RBratcher, ET 64, ’52/53, 93; New Docs 1, 43; JDerrett, NovT 13, ’71, 241–58 on the public transport system; cp. Lk 19:31, 34), but they record that he was addressed as ‘Lord’ (κύριε), once in Mk (7:28) and more oft. in Mt, e.g. 8:2, 6, 8, 21, 25; 9:28; 14:28, 30; 15:22, 25, 27; 16:22 (also ApcSed 12:2).—Lk refers to Jesus much more frequently as ὁ κ. (Iren. 1, prol. 2 [Harv. I 4, 5] and 5, 26, 2 [Harv. II 396, 2]): 7:13; 10:1, 39 (Ἰησοῦ P75; τοῦ Ἰησοῦ P45 et al.), 41; 11:39; 12:42a; 13:15; 17:5f; 18:6; 19:8 al. The voc. κύριε is also found oft.: 5:8, 12; 9:54, 61; 10:17, 40; 11:1; 12:41 al.—In J the designation ὁ κ. occurs rarely, in the first 19 chapters only in passages that are text-critically uncertain (4:1 v.l.; 6:23, with omission in some mss.) or that have been suspected on other grounds (11:2); then 20:2, 18, 20, 25; cp. vss. 13, 28; 21:7ab, 12. On the other hand, κύριε in address is extraordinarily common throughout the whole book: 4:11, 15, 19, 49; 5:7; 6:34, 68 al. (more than 30 times).—In the long ending of Mk we have the designation ὁ κ. twice, 16:19, 20. In GPt ὁ κ. occurs 1:2; 2:3ab; 3:6, 8; 4:10; 5:19; 6:21, 24; 12:50ab; 14:59, 60 (in the last pass. without the art.); the fragment that has been preserved hardly affords any opportunity for the use of the voc. 2 Cl introduces apocryphal sayings of Jesus with λέγει ὁ κ. 5:2; λ. ὁ κ. ἐν τ. εὐαγγελίῳ 8:5.—Repeated κύριε, κύριε Mt 7:21f; Lk 6:46; 2 Cl 4:2 (TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 26 [Stone p. 20]; ApcMos 25 p. 14, 1 Tdf.; s. KKöhler, StKr 88, 1915, 471–90).
    ג. Even in the passages already mentioned the use of the word κ. raises Jesus above the human level (Mani is also κ. for his people: Kephal. I 183, 11; 13; 16); this tendency becomes even clearer in the following places: ὁ κύριος Ac 5:14; 9:10f, 42; 11:23f; 22:10b; Ro 12:11; 14:8; 1 Cor 6:13f, 17; 7:10, 12; 2 Cor 5:6, 8; Gal 1:19; Col 1:10; 1 Th 4:15b; 2 Th 3:1; Hb 2:3; Js 5:7f; B 5:5; IEph 10:3; AcPl Ha 6, 21; 7, 5; 27; 8, 2; AcPlCor 1:6, 14.—Without the art. 1 Cor 4:4; 7:22b; 10:21ab; 2 Cor 12:1; 1 Th 4:15a; 2 Ti 2:24; AcPlCor 1:8. So esp. in combinations w. preps.: ἀπὸ κυρίου Col 3:24. κατὰ κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. παρὰ κυρίου Eph 6:8. πρὸς κύριον 2 Cor 3:16; AcPl Ha 6, 9. πρὸς τὸν κ. 8, 23. σὺν κυρίῳ 1 Th 4:17b. ὑπὸ κυρίου 1 Cor 7:25b; 2 Th 2:13. Esp. freq. is the Pauline formula ἐν κυρίῳ (lit. on ἐν 4c), which appears outside Paul’s letters only Rv 14:13; IPol 8:3; AcPl Ha 3, 23; AcPlCor 1:1, 16 (cp. Pol 1:1 ἐν κυρίῳ ἡμῶν Ἰ. Χριστῷ): 1 Cor 11:11; Phlm 16; πιστὸς ἐν κ. 1 Cor 4:17; cp. Eph 6:21; Hm 4, 1, 4; φῶς ἐν κ. Eph 5:8. ἡ σφραγίς μου τ. ἀποστολῆς ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν κ. 1 Cor 9:2. W. verbs: ἀσπάζεσθαι Ro 16:22 (GBahr, CBQ 28, ’66, 465f renders: in the service of my master, i.e. Paul); 1 Cor 16:19. ἐνδυναμοῦσθαι Eph 6:10. καλεῖσθαι 1 Cor 7:22a. καυχᾶσθαι 1:31. κοπιᾶν Ro 16:12ab; μαρτύρεσθαι Eph 4:17. παραλαμβάνειν διακονίαν Col 4:17. πεποιθέναι εἴς τινα Gal 5:10. ἐπί τινα 2 Th 3:4; cp. Phil 1:14; 2:24. προί̈στασθαι 1 Th 5:12. προσδέχεσθαι Ro 16:2; Phil 2:29. στήκειν 4:1; 1 Th 3:8. ὑπακούειν Eph 6:1. τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖν Phil 4:2. θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν κ. 2 Cor 2:12.—W. διδάσκαλος J 13:13f. W. σωτήρ 2 Pt 3:2; cp. 1:11; 2:20 (Just., D. 39, 2). W. Χριστός Ac 2:36; cp. Χριστὸς κύριος (La 4:20; PsSol 17, 32 v.l. [GBeale, Christos Kyrios in PsSol 17:32—‘The Lord’s Anointed’ Reconsidered: NTS 31, ’85, 620–27]; PsSol 18 ins) Lk 2:11. ὁ κ. Χριστός AcPlCor 2:3. Esp. freq. are the formulas ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Ac 1:21; 4:33; 8:16; 11:20; 15:11; 16:31; 19:5, 13, 17; 20:24, 35; 21:13; 1 Cor 11:23; 16:23; 2 Cor 4:14; 11:31; Gal 6:17 v.l.; Eph 1:15; 1 Th 2:15; 4:2; 2 Th 1:7; 2:8; Phlm 5.—ὁ κ. Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 11:17; 28:31; Ro 13:14; 2 Cor 13:13; Phil 4:23; 2 Th 3:6; Phlm 25; 1 Cl 21:6 (Ar. 15, 1). Without the art. mostly in introductions to letters Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; 6:23; Phil 1:2; 3:20; 1 Th 1:1; 2 Th 1:2, 12b; 1 Ti 5:21 v.l.; Js 1:1; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς κ. 2 Cor 4:5; Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. Col 2:6. Χριστὸς ὁ κ. 2 Cl 9:5. In an appeal κύριε Ἰησοῦ (cp. Sb 8316, 5f κύριε Σάραπι; PGM 7, 331 κύριε Ἄνουβι) Ac 7:59; Rv 22:20. κύριε AcPl Ha 7:30f, 40.—W. gen. of pers. (in many places the mss. vary considerably in adding or omitting this gen.) ὁ κ. μου ISm 5:2. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 2 Ti 1:8; Hb 7:14; IPhld ins; ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Ac 20:21; 1 Cor 5:4; 2 Cor 1:14; 1 Th 2:19; 3:11, 13; 2 Th 1:8; Hb 13:20. Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν 1 Cor 9:1. ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ro 16:18 (the only pass. in Paul without Ἰησοῦς). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός Ac 15:26; Ro 5:1, 11; 15:6, 30; 1 Cor 1:2, 7f, 10; 6:11 v.l.; 15:57; 2 Cor 1:3; 8:9; Gal 6:14, 18; Eph 1:3; 5:20; 6:24; Col 1:3; 1 Th 1:3; 5:9, 23, 28; 2 Th 2:1, 14, 16; 3:18; 1 Ti 6:3, 14; Js 2:1; 1 Pt 1:3; 2 Pt 1:8, 14, 16; Jd 4, 17, 21 (also TestSol 1:12 D). ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Χριστός Ἰησοῦς AcPlCor 2:5; cp. AcPl Ha 8, 17=Ox 1602, 20f/BMM recto 22. Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 1:4; 5:21; 7:25; 1 Cor 1:9; Jd 25 (Just., D. 41, 4). (ὁ) Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. ἡμῶν Ro 6:11 v.l., 23; 8:39; 1 Cor 15:31; Eph 3:11; 1 Ti 1:2, 12; 2 Ti 1:2 (ὁ ἡμέτερος κ. Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς Just., D. 32, 3 and 47, 5 al.). Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς ὁ κ. μου Phil 3:8. ὁ κ. μου Χριστὸς Ἰησοῦς AcPl Ha 7, 29. ὁ κ. αὐτῶν Rv 11:8.—W. other genitives: πάντων κ. Lord over all (cp. Pind., I. 5, 53 Ζεὺς ὁ πάντων κ.; Plut., Mor. 355e Osiris; PGM 13, 202) Ac 10:36; Ro 10:12. κ. κυρίων (cp. En 9:4) Rv 17:14; 19:16.—That ‘Jesus is κύριο’ (perh. ‘our κύριος is Jesus’) is the confession of the (Pauline) Christian church: Ro 10:9; 1 Cor 12:3; cp. 8:6; Phil 2:11 (on the latter pass. s. under ἁρπαγμός and κενόω 1. Cp. also Diod S 5, 72, 1: after Zeus was raised ἐκ γῆς εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, there arose in the ψυχαῖς of all those who had experienced his benefactions, the belief ὡς ἁπάντων τῶν γινομένων κατὰ οὐρανὸν οὗτος εἴη κύριος; s. also 3, 61, 6 Zeus acclaimed ‘God and Lord’).—In J the confession takes the form ὁ κύριός μου καὶ ὁ θεός μου J 20:28 (on the combination of κύριος and θεός s. θεός, beg., and 3c).—JFitzmyer, The Semitic Background of the NT Kyrios-Title: A Wandering Aramaean—Collected Aramaic Essays ’79, 115–42; s. also 87–90.
    δ. In some places it is not clear whether God or Christ is meant, cp. Ac 9:31; 1 Cor 4:19; 7:17; 2 Cor 8:21; Col 3:22b; 1 Th 4:6; 2 Th 3:16 al.
    ε. of other transcendent beings
    א. an angel Ac 10:4 (JosAs 14:6 al.; GrBar 4:1 al.; ApcZeph). p. 129 Denis.
    ב. in contrast to the one κύριος of the Christians there are θεοὶ πολλοὶ καὶ κύριοι πολλοί many gods and many lords 1 Cor 8:5 (cp. Dt 10:17); we cannot say just what difference, if any, Paul makes betw. these θεοί and κύριοι; unless we have here an hendiadys, the apostle may imply that the κ. are of lower rank than the θ. (sim. Did., Gen. 248, 5. On the many θεοί and lesser divinities cp. Maximus Tyr. 11, 5ab θεὸς εἷς πάντων βασιλεὺς κ. πατήρ, κ. θεοὶ πολλοί, θεοῦ παῖδες [= δαίμονες 11, 12a], συνάρχοντες θεοῦ. Ταῦτα κ. ὁ Ἕλλην λέγει, κ. ὁ βάρβαρος; 8, 8ef. Also Diog. L. 8, 23 the saying of Pythagoras, that humankind must τοὺς θεοὺς δαιμόνων προτιμᾶν=honor the deities more than the divinities or demi-gods δαίμονες; Heraclitus, Fgm. 5 divides the celestial realm into θεοὶ καὶ ἥρωες. S. also κυριότης 3 and, in a way, PGM 36, 246 κύριοι ἄγγελοι; s. also θεός 1).—On the whole word s. WGraf Baudissin, Kyrios als Gottesname im Judentum u. s. Stelle in d. Religionsgesch., 4 vols. 1926–29; SvenHerner, Die Anwendung d. Wortes κ. im NT 1903; Dssm., LO 298ff [LAE 353ff]; BBacon, Jesus as Lord: HTR 4, 1911, 204–28; WHeitmüller, ZNW 13, 1912, 333ff; HBöhlig, D. Geisteskultur v. Tarsos 1913, 53ff, Zum Begriff κύριος bei Pls: ZNW 14, 1913, 23ff, ʼΕν κυρίῳ: Heinrici Festschr. 1914, 170ff; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921 [Engl. tr. JSteely ’70]; PWern-le, ZTK 25, 1915, 1–92; PAlthaus, NKZ 26, 1915, 439ff; 513ff; Heitmüller, ZTK 25, 1915, 156ff; Bousset, Jesus der Herr 1916; GVos, The Continuity of the Kyrios Title in the NT: PTR 13, 1915, 161–89, The Kyrios Christos Controversy: ibid. 15, 1917, 21–89; EWeber, Zum Gebrauch der κύριος-Bez.: NKZ 31, 1920, 254ff; ERohde, Gottesglaube u. Kyriosglaube bei Paulus: ZNW 22, 1923, 43ff; RSeeberg, D. Ursprung des Christenglaubens 1914; JWeiss, D. Urchristentum 1917, 351ff; Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 10:9; Burton, ICC Gal 1921, 399–404; WFoerster, Herr ist Jesus 1924; AFrövig, D. Kyriosglaube des NTs 1928; ELohmeyer, Kyr. Jesus 1928; EvDobschütz, Κύριος Ἰησοῦς: ZNW 30, ’31, 97–123 (lit.); OMichel, D. Christus des Pls: ZNW 32, ’33, 6–31; also 28, 1929, 324–33; Dodd 9–11; LCerfaux, ‘Kyrios’ dans les citations paul. de l’AT: ETL 20, ’43, 5–17; FGrant, An Introd. to NT Thought ’50, 130–37; PÉLangevin, Jésus Seigneur ’67; IPotterie, BRigaux Festschr. ’70, 117–46 (Luke); JKingsbury, JBL 94, ’75, 246–55 (Mt); FDanker, Luke ’87, 60–81; DZeller, 925–28 (lit.).—B. 1330. Schürer II 326. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κύριος

  • 20 περί

    περί (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. and acc., in our lit. not w. dat. (B-D-F §203; Rob. 617; see the lit. s.v. ἀνά, beg.) lit. ‘round about’
    w. the gen. to denote the object or pers. to which (whom) an activity or esp. inward process refers or relates, about, concerning
    after verbs that denote an oral or written expression or its reception, a mental action, knowing, thinking, recognizing, etc., about, concerning; s. the entries ἀκούω 1c and 3c, ἀναγγέλλω 2 end, ἀπαγγέλλω 1, ἀπολογέομαι, γνωρίζω 1, γογγύζω, γράφω 2c, δηλόω, διαβεβαιόομαι, διαλέγομαι 1, διδάσκω 2d, διηγέομαι, εἶπον 1a, ἐντέλλω, ἐπιστέλλω, κατηχέω, λαλέω 2aγ, λέγω 1bδ; λόγον αἰτεῖν, ἀποδιδόναι, διδόναι, ποιεῖσθαι (s. λόγος 2a); μαρτυρέω 1b, μνημονεύω 1c, ὁμιλέω, πυνθάνομαι, προκαταγγέλλω, προφητεύω, ὑπομιμνῄσκω, χρηματίζομαι; ἀγνοέω 1a, ἀπορέω, ἐπινοέω, ἐπίσταμαι 2, οἶδα 1h, πέπεισμαι (s. πείθω 4), πιστεύω 1aβ. Also used w. the substantives belonging to these verbs or verbs w. similar mngs.: ἀπολογία 2a, γογγυσμός; διήγησις, εὐαγγέλιον, ἦχος 2, πρόφασις, φήμη; s. these entries. γινώσκω J 7:17. συμφωνέω Mt 18:19. τί ὑμῖν δοκεῖ περὶ τοῦ Χριστοῦ; what do you think of the Christ? 22:42.
    after verbs that express considering, asking, examining, charging, judging, censuring, punishing, praising, etc., on account of, because of, for, concerning. S. the entries ἀποστοματίζω, ἀπορέω, διαπορέω, ἐγκαλέω, εἶδον (3: deliberate concerning), ἐκζητέω 1, ἐλέγχω 2 and 3, ἐξετάζω 1 and 2b, ἐπερωτάω 1a, ἐπιζητέω 1b, ἐρωτάω 1, ζητέω 2, κατηγορέω, παραμυθέομαι.—διαλογίζομαι Lk 3:15. κρίνω J 8:26. λιθάζω 10:33. θεὸν αἰνέω Lk 19:37. περὶ οὗ … οἱ κατήγοροι οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν ἔφερον his accusers brought no charge of this kind Ac 25:18 (BWeiss, Preuschen take περὶ οὗ w. σταθέντες, which immediately follows it, and understand it to mean ‘around him’, ‘near him’ [περί τινος in this sense IG XIV, 2508, 4]).—S. also the entry ζήτημα.
    after verbs that denote emotion. S. the entries ἀγανακτέω, θαυμάζω 1aβ, καυχάομαι, σπλαγχνίζομαι.
    after verbs of caring (for). S. the entries μέλει 1b, μεριμνάω, προβλέπω.
    after other verbs and expressions, mostly with regard to, with reference to, in relation to, w. respect to εὐλογεῖν Hb 11:20. ἀναβαίνειν περὶ τοῦ ζητήματος go up about the question Ac 15:2. ἐντολὰς λαμβάνειν Col 4:10. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν 1 Cor 7:37 (s. ἐξουσία 1). περὶ πάντων εὐοδοῦσθαι be well off in all respects 3J 2 (περὶ π.=‘in all resp.’: Pla., Gorg. 23, 467d.—Others take it as ‘above all’; cp. Il. 1, 287; 21, 566).
    w. certain verbs and nouns such as ‘ask’, ‘pray’, ‘prayer’, etc., περί introduces the pers. or thing in whose interest the petition is made. Thus it takes the place of ὑπέρ (B-D-F §229, 1; Rob. 618; WSchulze, Zeitschr. für vergl. Sprachforschung 44, 1911, 359: Callim., Epigr. 55, 3.—SIG 1170, 30 περὶ τούτου παρεκάλεσα τὸν θεόν; POxy 1298, 4; 1494, 6; JosAs 28:5 ἐξιλάσομαι αὐτοὺς περὶ ὑμῶν; EpArist 273) for. S. the entries δέομαι b, δέησις, ἐρωτάω 2, παρακαλέω 3. προσεύχεσθαι (Gen 20:7; 1 Km 7:5; 2 Macc 1:6; 15:14) Lk 6:28; Col 1:3 (v.l. ὑπέρ); 4:3; 1 Th 5:25; 2 Th 1:11; 3:1; Hb 13:18. προσευχὴ γίνεται Ac 12:5. Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη περὶ ὑμῶν; 1 Cor 1:13 v.l. (for ὑπέρ). τὸ αἷμα τὸ περὶ πολλῶν ἐκχυννόμενον Mt 26:28 (cp. Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 730, 29 p. 415, 29 Jac. περὶ τῶν διαδόχων αὐτοῦ ἅπαν … παθεῖν). ἀγῶνα ἔχω περὶ ὑμῶν Col 2:1 v.l. (for ὑπέρ).
    when used w. ἁμαρτία the word ‘for’ has the sense to take away, to atone for περὶ ἁμαρτίας (Num 8:8) Ro 8:3 (difft. TThornton, JTS 22, ’71, 515–17). Ἰ. Χρ. τοῦ δόντος ἑαυτὸν περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν Gal 1:4 v.l. (for ὑπέρ; CBreytenbach, Versöhnung ’89, 197). περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν ἔπαθεν 1 Pt 3:18 (v.l. ἀπέθανεν). Cp. Hb 5:3c. προσφορὰ περὶ ἁμαρτίας 10:18. θυσία περὶ ἁμαρτιῶν vs. 26. εἰσφέρεται τὸ αἷμα περὶ ἁμαρτίας 13:11. τὸ περὶ τῆς ἁμαρτίας (i.e. προσφερόμενον) the sin-offering (Lev 6:23; 14:19) Hb 10:6, 8 (both Ps 39:7).
    περί τινος abs. at the beginning of a sentence concerning, with reference to (GrBar 8:6; Just., A I, 15, 1 al.; SIG 736, 1; PEleph 13, 4f; BGU 246, 13; 17; 1097, 5 [c. 50 A.D.]; 1095, 9 [57 A.D.]) περὶ ὧν (=περὶ τούτων ἃ) ἐγράψατε concerning the things you wrote (to me) 1 Cor 7:1 (s. γράφω 2c). Cp. 8:1; 16:1, 12. In other, seemingly similar, places it is to be connected w. the verb that follows: Mt 22:31; 24:36; Mk 12:26; 13:32; 1 Cor 7:25; 8:4; 12:1; 2 Cor 9:1; 1 Th 4:9; 5:1. (Cp. the formulation of answers by Claudius in PLond 1912; on Paul’s rhetorical use, cp. Demosth. 7, 1; 14; 18; 30; 39; MMitchell NovT 31, ’89, 229–56.)
    w. the art. τὰ περί τινος what concerns someone or someth., his or its circumstances, situation, condition (X., An. 2, 5, 37 ὅπως μάθοι τὰ περὶ Προξένου; Sir 19:30; TestJob 41:3; JosAs 19:2; GrBar 4:12; Just., A I, 33, 5; Tat. 36, 2) τὰ περὶ (τοῦ) Ἰησοῦ the reports about Jesus, concerning his miracles Mk 5:27; of Jesus’ passion experiences Lk 24:19; of the preaching about Jesus Ac 18:25; cp. 28:31. τὰ περὶ ἑαυτοῦ (αὐτοῦ, ἐμοῦ, ἐμαυτοῦ, ἡμῶν, ὑμῶν) Lk 24:27; Ac 23:11, 15; 24:10; 28:15; Eph 6:22; Phil 1:27; 2:19f; Col 4:8.—τὰ περὶ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ θεοῦ the things concerning the Kgdm. of God Ac 1:3; 19:8 (v.l. without the art.). τὰ περὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ 24:22 (ὁδός 3c).
    w. the acc., gener. in ref. to position rather than mental or emotional considerations as in the use of the gen., about
    of place around, about, near (TestJob 40:6 περί τινα φάτνην; 12 περὶ τὴν οἰκίαν; Ath. 25, 1 ἄγγελοι … περὶ τὸν ἀέρα ἔχοντες καὶ τὴν γῆν)
    α. (all) around ἕως ὅτου σκάψω περὶ αὐτήν until I dig (all) around it Lk 13:8. περιαστράψαι φῶς περὶ ἐμέ Ac 22:6b. αἱ παρθένοι ἑστηκυῖαι περὶ τὴν πύλην who stood about the door Hs 9, 3, 2.
    β. of a part of the body around which someth. goes (Heraclid. Pont. Fgm. 55 W. περὶ τὸ μέτωπον; PsSol 2:20 περὶ τὴν κεφαλήν; TestJob 46:9 περὶ τὸ στῆθος; JosAs 3:9 περὶ τὰς χεῖρας): a belt περὶ τὴν ὀσφύν around the waist Mt 3:4; Mk 1:6 (JosAs 14:16); cp. Rv 15:6. A millstone περίκειται περὶ τὸν τράχηλον Mk 9:42; Lk 17:2 (JosAs 18:5); cp. Mt 18:6.
    γ. of nearby places: αἱ περὶ αὐτὰς πόλεις the towns near them (Sodom and Gomorrah) Jd 7. τὰ περὶ τὸν τόπον the region around the place Ac 28:7 (Diod S 1, 50, 6 τὰ π. τὴν Μέμφιν; Strabo 12, 7, 3). Without the art. περὶ Τύρον καὶ Σιδῶνα the neighborhood of T. and S. Mk 3:8.
    δ. of persons who are standing, sitting, working or staying close to someone ὄχλον περὶ αὐτόν Mt 8:18; cp. Mk 9:14. τοὺς περὶ αὐτὸν κύκλῳ καθημένους Mk 3:34; cp. vs. 32. οἱ περὶ αὐτόν those about him, his followers Mk 4:10; Lk 22:49. The central person in the group can be included: οἱ περὶ Παῦλον Paul and his companions Ac 13:13; 21:8 v.l. οἱ περὶ τὸν Πέτρον Peter and those with him short ending of Mark; GHb 356, 38f= ISm 3:2; cp. GHb 22, 39 (Pla., Thu., X.; Diod S 11, 40, 3; 11, 61, 3 οἱ περὶ τὸν Κίμωνα=Cimon and his men; ins, pap; 2 Macc 1:33; 8:30; 4 Macc 2:19; JosAs 26:5; Jos., Bell. 5, 10, Ant. 18, 354 al.; Tat. 36, 1 al.; B-D-F §228; Rob. 620). οἱ περὶ τὸν κεντυρίωνα the centurion and his men GPt 11:45. πρὸς τὰς περὶ Μάρθαν καὶ Μαριάμ J 11:19 v.l. prob. means only the two sisters to Martha and Mary (cp. Phalaris, Ep. 136; Polyb. 4, 36, 6; 21, 11, 2; Diod S 1, 16, 1; 1, 37, 3; 16, 85, 2 οἱ περὶ Χάρητα καὶ Λυσικλέα=Chares and Lysicles [are made generals]; Plut., Tib. Gracch. 825 [2, 3] οἱ περὶ Δροῦσον = Δροῦσος, Pyrrh. 395 [20, 1] οἱ περὶ Γάϊον Φαβρίκιον = Γάϊος Φαβρίκιος; Diog. L. 2, 43 οἱ περὶ Αἰσχύλον=Aeschylus; 2, 105; EpArist 51; Philo, Vi. Cont. 15; Jos., Ant. 13, 187; 15, 370, C. Ap. 1, 17). οἱ π. τὸν Παῦλον Ac 27:1a v.l.=Παῦλος vs. 1b.
    of time about, near (Hdt., Thu., X. et al.; PGen 17, 10; PGiss 70, 7; Gen 15:12; Ex 11:4) περὶ τρίτην ὥραν (Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 45 §182; TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 11 [Stone p. 12] and B 6 p. 109, 27 [Stone p. 66]; Jos., Vi. 239; cp. 243; PSI 184, 5 χθὲς περὶ ἕκτην ὥραν) about the third hour Mt 20:3. Likew. w. the hour given vs. 5f, 9; 27:46; Ac 10:3 (ὡσεὶ περὶ ὥραν ἐνάτην; ApcMos 17 περὶ ὥραν, ὅταν), 9; cp. Mk 6:48; Ac 22:6a.
    of being occupied with (Just., D. 2, 5 χρόνον ἐκτρίβειν περὶ ἐκεῖνα τὰ μαθματα; 8, 3 τῆς περὶ τὸ θεῖον ὁρμῆς; Tat. 27, 3; Ath. 17, 3) περισπᾶσθαι (q.v. 2), θορυβάζεσθαι περί τι Lk 10:40f. οἱ π. τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάται the workers who were occupied with such things (s. ἐργάτης 1a) Ac 19:25.
    with regard or respect to (Diod S 2, 18, 2 ἡ περὶ αὐτὴν ἀρετή=her valor; Lucian, Vit. Auct. 17 οἱ περὶ μοιχείαν νόμοι; ApcEsdr 1:6 δικάσασθαι … περὶ τὸ γένος τῶν χριστιανῶν; Jos., Ant. 5, 259; Mel., HE 4, 26, 13 σου τὸ σπουδαῖον περὶ τὴν πίστιν) ἀστοχεῖν 1 Ti 6:21; 2 Ti 2:18. ναυαγεῖν 1 Ti 1:19. νοσεῖν have a morbid craving for someth. (s. νοσέω) 6:4. περὶ πάντα in all respects Tit 2:7.—Pol 4:3; παράδοξον περὶ Ἰοῦστον … γέγονος a miracle that took place involving Justus Papias (2:9). On 2 Cl 17:2 s. ἀνάγω 5.—τὰ περὶ ἐμέ my situation, how I am getting along (Menand., Sam. 623 S. [Kö. 278]; UPZ 68, 6 [152 B.C.] τὰ περὶ Ἀπολλώνιον; Just., A I, 54, 2 τὰ περὶ τὸν Χριστόν; Tat. 8, 4 τὰ περὶ σέ; Jos., Ant. 2, 60) Phil 2:23. αἱ π. τὰ λοιπὰ ἐπιθυμίαι desires for other things Mk 4:19.—DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > περί

См. также в других словарях:

  • Connected Mathematics — is a comprehensive, problem centered curriculum designed for all students in grades 6 8 based on the NCTM standards. The curriculum was developed by the Connected Mathematics Project (CMP) at Michigan State University and funded by the National… …   Wikipedia

  • Connected: Coast to Coast — Format Talk show Presented by Monica Crowley Ron Reagan Country of origin United States Production Running time …   Wikipedia

  • sense organ — n a bodily structure that receives a stimulus (as heat or sound waves) and is affected in such a manner as to initiate a wave of excitation in associated sensory nerve fibers which convey specific impulses to the central nervous system where they …   Medical dictionary

  • Connected space — For other uses, see Connection (disambiguation). Connected and disconnected subspaces of R² The green space A at top is simply connected whereas the blue space B below is not connected …   Wikipedia

  • Sense and reference — Sinn redirects here. For other uses, see Sinn (disambiguation). Über Sinn und Bedeutung; click to read Sinn and bedeutung are usually translated, respectively, as sense and reference. Two different aspects of some terms meanings, a term s… …   Wikipedia

  • Connected category — In category theory, a branch of mathematics, a connected category is a category in which, for every two objects X and Y there is a finite sequence of objects with morphisms or for each 0 ≤ i < n (both directions are allowed in the same… …   Wikipedia

  • sense — /sɛns / (say sens) noun 1. each of the special faculties connected with bodily organs by which human beings and other animals perceive external objects and their own bodily changes (commonly reckoned as sight, hearing, smell, taste, and touch). 2 …  

  • Sense (electronics) — In electronics, sense is a technique used in power supplies to produce the correct voltage for a load. Although simple batteries naturally maintain a steady voltage (except in cases of large internal impedance), a power supply must use a feedback …   Wikipedia

  • sense organ — a collection of specialized cells (receptors), connected to the nervous system, that is capable of responding to a particular stimulus from either outside or inside the body. Sense organs can detect light (the eyes), heat, pain, and touch (the… …   The new mediacal dictionary

  • Cloud Connected — Single by In Flames from the album Reroute to Remain Released 2002 …   Wikipedia

  • Simply connected space — In topology, a topological space is called simply connected (or 1 connected) if it is path connected and every path between two points can be continuously transformed, staying within the space, into any other path while preserving the two… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»